CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular

CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
 Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories
or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs,
including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any copyright Motorola computer
programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express
written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication,
estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operation
of law in the sale of a product.
Restrictions
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license agreement and may be used and/or
disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized
copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval
system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola.
Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola assumes no liability resulting from any
inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes
to any products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make
changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume
any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent
rights of others.
Trademarks
Motorola and the Motorola logo are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc.
Intelligence Everywhere, M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc.
All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Contents
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
ETSI standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Feature references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Cross references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Data encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Text conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Special key sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Reporting safety issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Warnings and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Definition of Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Example and format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Failure to comply with warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Definition of Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Example and format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
General warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Specific warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Potentially hazardous voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
RF radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Laser radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Lifting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Parts substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Battery supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Lithium batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
General cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Caution labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Specific cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Fibre optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Static discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Devices sensitive to static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Special handling techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 1: Principles of Cellular Telecommunications

Principles of Cellular Telecommunications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 3
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 3
Principles of Cellular Telecommunications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 4
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 4
Advantages of Cellular Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 4
Network Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 6
Frequency Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 8
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 8
Cell Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Large Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular i

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Contents CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular

Small Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

The Trade Off - Large vs Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Frequency Re-use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Co-channel Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Adjacent Channel Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Sectorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Using Sectored Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
4 Site/3 Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Switching and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Chapter 2: Features of GSM

Features of GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 3
Section Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 3
Features of GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4
Noise Robust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 6
Flexibility and Increased Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 8
Use of Standardised Open Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Improved Security and Confidentiality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Flexible Handover Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
ISDN Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2B+D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Enhanced Range Of Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Speech Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Telephony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Emergency Calls (with/without SIM Card inserted in MS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Short Message Service Point To Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Short Message Cell Broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Advanced Message Handling Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Dual Personal and Business Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Data Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Supplementary Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Number Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Call Barring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Call Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Multi-party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Chapter 3: GSM Network Components

GSM Network Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 3
Section Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 3
GSM Network Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 4
Mobile Station (MS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 6
Mobile Equipment (ME). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 8
Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Base Station System (BSS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Base Station Controller (BSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Base Transceiver Station - BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
BSS Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Transcoder (XCDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Network Switching System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Mobile Services Switching Centre (MSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Home Location Register (HLR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Visitor Location Register (VLR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Location Area Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

ii CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular Contents

Mobile Subscriber Roaming Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Equipment Identity Register (EIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Authentication Centre (AUC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Authentication Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Interworking Function (IWF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Echo Canceller (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Operations and Maintenance System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Network Management Centre (NMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Network Management Centre (NMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
The Network In Reality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Chapter 4: GSM Terrestrial Interfaces

GSM Terrestrial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 3
Section Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 4
2 Mbit/s Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 6
Typical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 6
X.25 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 8
ITU-TS Signalling System #7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Acronyms: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
A-bis (LAPD) Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Interface Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Chapter 5: Channels on the Air Interface

Channels on the Air Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 3
Section Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 3
Transmission of Analogue and Digital Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 4
Modulation Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 4
Transmission of Digital Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 6
Phase Shift Keying (PSK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 6
Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 6
Physical and Logical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 8
GSM Physical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 8
GSM Logical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Traffic Channels (TCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Acronyms: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Speech Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
GSM Control Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
BCCH Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
CCCH Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
DCCH Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
GSM Logical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Control Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Control Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Common Control Channels (CCCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Acronyms: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Control Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Dedicated Control Channels (DCCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Associated Control Channels (ACCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Acronyms: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Channel Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Channel Combinations and Timeslots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular iii

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Contents CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular

Multiframes and Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

The 26-frame Traffic Channel Multiframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
The 51-frame Control Channel Multiframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
The 51-frame Control Channel Multiframe (BCCH/CCCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
The 51-frame Control Channel Multiframe - DCCH/8 (SDCCH and SACCH) . . . . . . . . . 5-28
The 51-frame Control Channel Multiframe - Combined Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Superframes and Hyperframes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Mobile Activity - Transmit and Receive Timeslots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
GSM Basic Call Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Chapter 6: Channel Coding on the Air Interface

Channel Coding on the Air Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 3
Section Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 3
GSM Bursts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 4
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 4
Guard Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 4
Stealing Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 4
Training Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 4
Tail Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 4
Burst Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 6
Normal Burst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 6
Frequency Correction Burst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 6
Synchronization Burst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 6
Dummy Burst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 6
Access Burst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 6
Error Protection and Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 8
Speech Channel Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Channel Coding for Enhanced Full Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Preliminary Channel Coding for EFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Error Protection and Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Control Channel Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Data Channel Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Mapping Logical Channels onto the TDMA Frame Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Interleaving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Diagonal Interleaving - Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Transmission - Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Rectangular Interleaving - Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Transmission - Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Diagonal Interleaving - Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Transmission - Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

Chapter 7: Radio Interface Optimization

Radio Interface Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 3
Section Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 3
Transmission Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 4
Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 6
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 6
Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 6
Voice Activity Detection (VAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 8
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 8
Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 8
Discontinuous Reception (DRX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Multipath Fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Frequency Hopping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

iv CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Chapter 8: Call and Handover Sequences

Call and Handover Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 3
Section Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 3
GSM Basic Call Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 4
Mobile to Land Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 6
Keys to the diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 6
Land to Mobile Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 8
Key to the diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 8
Land to Mobile Sequence (cont.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Key to the diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
MS Initiated Call Clearing Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Key to the diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Inter-BSS Handover Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Key to the diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Acronyms: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Location Update Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Key to the diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Authentication and Ciphering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Key to the diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Key to the diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Chapter 9: Introduction to Microcellular

Introduction to Microcellular. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 3
Section Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 4
What is Microcell? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 4
Why Deploy Microcells? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 4
How are Microcells Deployed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 6
Building Penetration from Externally Mounted Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 8
Antenna Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Directional Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Omni Antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Directional Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Omni Antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
The Microcellular Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Picocells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Chapter 10: CP02 Exercise

Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 3
Notes Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 8
Percentage: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 9

Chapter 11: Appendix 1 (GSM History & Organization)

GSM History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 3
Frequency Band Reserved for Cellular (1979) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 3
"Groupe Special Mobile" Created Within CEPT (1982) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 3
"Permanent Nucleus" Established (1986) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 3
ETSI takes over GSM (1988) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 3
Phase 1 GSM Recommendations Frozen (1990) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 3
GSM Changes to SMG (1991/1992) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 5
GSM is launched (1992) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 5
Phase 2 GSM Technical Specifications Frozen (1993) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 5
GSM Coverage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 5
SMG Subsidiary Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 8

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular v

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Contents CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 8
The Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 8
GSM History & Organisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
The GSM Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
GSM Coverage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Chapter 12: Glossary of technical terms

Glossary of technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 3
A Interface - AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 3
B Interface - Byte. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 7
C - CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
D Interface - DYNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
E - EXEC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
F Interface - Full Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
G Interface - GWY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
H Interface - Hyperframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
I - IWU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
k - KW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
L1 - LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
M - MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38
NACK - nW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42
O - Overlap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45
PA - PXPDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-47
QA- Quiesent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53
R - RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53
S7- SYSGEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58
T -TxBPF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-65
U - UUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-69
V - VTX host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-71
W - WWW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-73
X - X Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-74
ZC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-74

vi CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
About This Manual Version Rev

CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 1

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev General information

General information

Important notice
• Motorola disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or express, for any risk of damage, loss or
reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer,
or any one acting on the customers behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parameters
or recommendations made in Motorola Customer Product Documentation.
• If this manual was obtained when attending a Motorola training course, it will not be updated or
amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it was supplied under
normal operational circumstances, to support a major software release, then corrections will be
supplied automatically by Motorola in the form of General Manual Revisions (GMRs).

Purpose
Motorola Technical Training manuals are intended to support the delivery of Technical Training only
and are not intended to replace the use of Motorola Customer Product Documentation.
WARNING Failure to comply with Motorola’s operation, installation and
maintenance instructions may, in exceptional circumstances,
lead to serious injury or death.

These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by Motorola,
although they can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained through such training.

ETSI standards
The standards in the table below able are protected by copyright and are the property of
the European Telecommunications Standards Institue (ETSI).

ETSI specification number

GSM 02.60 GSM 04.10 GSM 08.08
GSM 03.60 GSM 04.11 GSM 08.16
GSM 03.64 GSM 04.12 GSM 08.18
GSM 04.01 GSM 04.13 GSM 08.51
GSM 04.02 GSM 04.60 GSM 08.52
GSM 04.03 GSM 04.64 GSM 08.54
GSM 04.04 GSM 04.65 GSM 08.56
GSM 04.05 GSM 08.01 GSM 08.58
GSM 04.06 GSM 08.02 GSM 09.18
GSM 04.07 GSM 08.04 GSM 09.60
GSM 04.08 GSM 08.06

Figures from the above cited technical specifications standards are used, in this training manual,
with the permission of ETSI. Further use, modification, or redistribution is strictly prohibited. ETSI
standards are available from http://pda.etsi.org/pda/ and http://etsi.org/eds/

2 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
General information Version Rev

Feature references
Most of the manuals in the set, of which this manual is part, are revised to accommodate features
released at Motorola General System Releases (GSRn) or GPRS Support Node (GSNn) releases. In
these manuals, new and amended features are tagged to help users to assess the impact on installed
networks. The tags are the appropriate Motorola Roadmap DataBase (RDB) numbers or Research
and Development Prioritization (RDP) numbers. The tags include index references which are listed
in the manual Index. The Index includes the entry feature which is followed by a list of the RDB or
RDP numbers for the released features, with page references and hot links in electronic copy.
The tags have the format: {nnnn} or {nnnnn}

Where: is:
{nnnn} the RDB number
{nnnnn} the RDP number

The tags are positioned in text as follows:

Table 1

New and amended feature information Tag position in text

New sentence/s or new or amended text. Immediately before the affected text.
Complete new blocks of text as follows: Immediately after the headings as follows:

• Full sections under a main heading • Main heading

• Full paragraphs under subheadings • Subheading

New or amended complete Figures and After the Figure or Table number and
Tables before the title text.
Warning, Caution and Note boxes. Immediately before the affected text in the
box.
General command syntax, operator input On a separate line immediately above the
or displays (in special fonts). affected item.

For a list of Roadmap numbers and the RDB or RDP numbers of the features included in this
software release, refer to the manualSystem Information: GSM Overview (68P02901W01), or
to the manual System Information: GPRS Overview (68P02903W01).

Cross references
Throughout this manual, references are made to external publications, chapter numbers
and section names. The references to external publications are shown in italics, chapter
and section name cross references are emphasised blue in text.
This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in turn, are
divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the top
of each page???, and are listed in the table of contents.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev General information

Data encryption
In order to avoid electronic eavesdropping, data passing between certain elements in the GSM
and GPRS network is encrypted. In order to comply with the export and import requirements of
particular countries, this encryption occurs at different levels as individually standardised, or may not
be present at all in some parts of the network in which it is normally implemented. The manual set,
of which this manual is a part, covers encryption as if fully implemented. Because the rules differ in
individual countries, limitations on the encryption included in the particular software being delivered,
are covered in the Release Notes that accompany the individual software release.

Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola cellular infrastructure manuals to represent
keyboard input text, screen output text and special key sequences.

Input
Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this.

Output

Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental

variables that appear on the screen are shown like this.

Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows:

CTRL-c Press the Control and c keys at the same time.

ALT-f Press the Alt and f keys at the same time.
¦ Press the pipe symbol key.
CR or RETURN Press the Return key.

4 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Reporting safety issues Version Rev

Reporting safety issues

Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in all instances. Ensure
that all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.

Procedure
Whenever a safety issue arises:

Safety issue reporting

1 Make the equipment concerned safe, for example by removing power.

2 Make no further attempt to adjust or rectify the equipment.
3 Report the problem directly to the Customer Network Resolution Centre,
Swindon +44 (0)1793 565444 or China +86 10 88417733 (telephone) and
follow up with a written report by fax, Swindon +44 (0)1793 430987 or China
+86 10 68423633 (fax).
4 Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the Customer
Network Resolution Centre.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Warnings and cautions

Warnings and cautions

The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual and
in all manuals of this Motorola manual set.

Warnings
A definition and example follow below:

Definition of Warning
A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life, physical
injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced during maintenance, for example, the use
of adhesives and solvents, as well as those inherent in the equipment.

Example and format

WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or data in/out connectors. Laser
radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated
fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

Failure to comply with warnings

Observe all warnings during all phases of operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment
described in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with these warnings, or with specific
warnings elsewhere in the Motorola manuals, or on the equipment itself, violates safety
standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Motorola assumes
no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

Cautions
A definition and example follow below:

Definition of Caution
A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, software or individual items of
equipment within a system. However, this presents no danger to personnel.

Example and format

CAUTION Do not use test equipment that is beyond its due calibration date;
arrange for calibration to be carried out.

6 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
General warnings Version Rev

General warnings
Observe the following specific warnings during all phases of operation, installation and
maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola manuals:

• Potentially hazardous voltage.

• Electric shock.
• RF radiation.
• Laser radiation.
• Heavy equipment.
• Parts substitution.
• Battery supplies.
• Lithium batteries,
Failure to comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola manuals,
violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Motorola
assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

Warning labels
Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on the equipment. Personnel
working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any warning labels fitted to the
equipment. Warning labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.

Specific warnings
Specific warnings used throughout the GSM manual set are shown below, and will
be incorporated into procedures as applicable.
These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any
other warnings given in text, in the illustrations and on the equipment. Potentially hazardous voltage

Potentially hazardous voltage

WARNING This equipment operates from a potentially hazardous voltage

of 230 V ac single phase or 415 V ac three phase supply. To
achieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the ac
input isolator must be set to off and locked.
When working with electrical equipment, reference must be made to the Electricity at Work Regulations
1989 (UK), or to the relevant electricity at work legislation for the country in which the equipment is used.
NOTE Motorola GSM equipment does not utilise high voltages.

Electric shock

WARNING Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until the
electric circuit is broken.
Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself with dry insulating
material and pull or push the victim clear of the conductor.
ALWAYS send for trained first aid or medical assistance IMMEDIATELY.
In cases of low voltage electric shock (including public supply voltages), serious injuries and even
death, may result. Direct electrical contact can stun a casualty causing breathing, and even the
heart, to stop. It can also cause skin burns at the points of entry and exit of the current.
In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificial respiration. ALWAYS
send for trained first aid or medical assistance IMMEDIATELY.
If the casualty is also suffering from burns, flood the affected area with cold water to
cool, until trained first aid or medical assistance arrives.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 7

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev General warnings

RF radiation

WARNING High RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in this

equipment when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched
off when any antenna connections have to be changed. Do not key
transmitters connected to unterminated cavities or feeders.
Relevant standards (USA and EC), to which regard should be paid when working with RF equipment are:

• ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure
to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz
• CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields
High Frequency (10 kHz to 300 GHz).

Laser radiation

WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors.
Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or
unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

Lifting equipment

WARNING When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing

equipment, a competent responsible person must ensure that
adequate lifting facilities are available. Where provided, lifting
frames must be used for these operations.
When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, the competent responsible
person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Where provided, lifting frames
must be used for these operations. When equipments have to be manhandled, reference must
be made to the Manual Handling of Loads Regulations 1992 (UK) or to the relevant manual
handling of loads legislation for the country in which the equipment is used.

Parts substitution

WARNING Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification

of equipment, because of the danger of introducing additional hazards.
Contact Motorola if in doubt to ensure that safety features are maintained.

Battery supplies

WARNING Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.

Lithium batteries

WARNING Lithium batteries, if subjected to mistreatment, may burst and

ignite. Defective lithium batteries must not be removed or
replaced. Any boards containing defective lithium batteries must
be returned to Motorola for repair.
Contact your local Motorola office for how to return defective lithium batteries.

8 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
General cautions Version Rev

General cautions
Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment
described in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with these cautions or with specific cautions
elsewhere in the Motorola manuals may result in damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes
no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

Caution labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any caution labels fitted
to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.

Specific cautions
Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text of this manual.
These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must
any other cautions given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.

Fibre optics

CAUTION Fibre optic cables must not be bent in a radius of less than 30 mm.

Static discharge

CAUTION Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices. These metal oxide

semiconductor (MOS) devices are susceptible to damage from
electrostatic charge. See the section Devices sensitive to static in
the preface of this manual for further information.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 9

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Devices sensitive to static

Devices sensitive to static

Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thin layer of
insulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Such a charge applied
to the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage.
These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing the hands into high
insulation packing material or by use of unearthed soldering irons.
MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leads shorted together,
for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or by inserting the leads into conductive plastic
foam. Provided the leads are shorted it is safe to handle the device.

Special handling techniques

In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced, observe the following
precautions when handling the replacement:

• Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostatic

point (ESP) on the equipment.
• Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may be necessary to replace
the conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable the device to be fitted.
• Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. A cotton overall is preferable.
• If possible work on an earthed metal surface or anti-static mat. Wipe insulated plastic
work surfaces with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation.
• All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placed on an earthed surface.
• Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitive devices.
These components may be providing protection to the device.
When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normally less susceptible
to electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled with care, preferably by their edges
and not by their tracks and pins, they should be transferred directly from their packing to the
equipment (or the other way around) and never left exposed on the workbench.

10 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Principles of Cellular Telecommunications Version Rev

Chapter 1

Principles of Cellular
Telecommunications

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 1-1

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Principles of Cellular Telecommunications

This page intentionally left blank.

1-2 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Principles of Cellular Telecommunications Version Rev

Principles of Cellular Telecommunications

Objectives
On completion of this section the student will be able to:
• Name the main components of a cellular network and describe their functionality.
• State the options available for site configuration.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 1-3

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Principles of Cellular Telecommunications

Principles of Cellular Telecommunications

Overview
A cellular telephone system links mobile station (MS) subscribers into the public telephone
system or to another cellular system’s MS subscriber.
Information sent between the MS subscriber and the cellular network uses radio communication.
This removes the necessity for the fixed wiring used in a traditional telephone installation.
Due to this, the MS subscriber is able to move around and become fully mobile,
perhaps travelling in a vehicle or on foot.

Advantages of Cellular Communications

Cellular networks have many advantages over the existing "land" telephone networks. There
are advantages for the network provider as well as the mobile subscriber.

1-4 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Principles of Cellular Telecommunications Version Rev

Overview

Advantages to Mobile Subscriber

 Mobility

 Flexibility

 Convenience

Advantages to Network Provider


 Network expansion flexibility

 Revenue/profit margins

 Efficiency

 Easier re-configuration

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 1-5

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Network Components

Network Components
GSM networks are made up of Mobile services Switching Centres (MSC), Base Station Systems
(BSS)and Mobile Stations (MS). These three entities can be broken down further into smaller
entities; such as, within the BSS we have Base Station Controllers, Base Transceiver Stations
and Transcoders. These smaller network elements, as they are referred to, will be discussed
later in the course. For now we will use the three major entities.
With the MSC, BSS and MS we can make calls, receive calls, perform billing etc, as any normal PSTN
network would be able to do. The only problem for the MS is that not all the calls made or received
are from other MSs. Therefore, it is also necessary to connect the GSM network to the PSTN.
Mobile Stations within the cellular network are located in "cells", these cells are provided by the BSSs.
Each BSS can provide one or more cells, dependent on the manufacturers equipment.
The cells are normally represented by a hexagon, but in practice they are irregular in shape. This is
as a result of the influence of the surrounding terrain, or of design by the network planners.

Actual Cell Coverage

Diagrammatic Cell Coverage

1-6 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Network Components Version Rev

Network Components

PSTN

MSC
BSS

MS
BSS

MS
BSS BSS

MS BSS MS

MS
BSS

MS

PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network)

MSC (Mobile service Switching Centre)

BSS (Base Station System)

MS (Mobile Station)

(Cell Coverage Area)

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 1-7

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Frequency Spectrum

Frequency Spectrum
Introduction
The frequency spectrum is very congested, with only narrow slots of bandwidth allocated for cellular
communications. The list opposite shows the number of frequencies and spectrum allocated for
GSM, Extended GSM 900 (EGSM), GSM 1800 (DCS1800) and PCS1900.
A single Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) or RF carrier is actually a pair of
frequencies, one used in each direction (transmit and receive). This allows information to be passed
in both directions. For GSM900 and EGSM900 the paired frequencies are separated by 45 MHz,
for DCS1800 the separation is 95 MHz and for PCS1900 separation is 80 MHz.
For each cell in a GSM network at least one ARFCN must be allocated, and more
may be allocated to provide greater capacity.
The RF carrier in GSM can support up to eight Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) timeslots.
That is, in theory, each RF carrier is capable of supporting up to eight simultaneous telephone calls,
but as we will see later in this course although this is possible, network signalling and messaging
may reduce the overall number from eight timeslots per RF carrier to six or seven timeslots per
RF carrier, therefore reducing the number of mobiles that can be supported.
Unlike a PSTN network, where every telephone is linked to the land network by a pair of fixed wires,
each MS only connects to the network over the radio interface when required. Therefore, it is possible
for a single RF carrier to support many more mobile stations than its eight TDMA timeslots would lead
us to believe. Using statistics, it has been found that a typical RF carrier can support up to 15, 20 or
even 25 MSs. Obviously, not all of these MS subscribers could make a call at the same time, but it
is also unlikely that all the MS subscribers would want to make a call at the same time. Therefore,
without knowing it, MSs share the same physical resources, but at different times.

1-8 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Frequency Spectrum Version Rev

Frequency Range

GSM 900
 Receive (uplink) 890-915 MHz
 Transmit (downlink) 935-960 MHz
 124 Absolute Radio Frequency Channels (ARFCN)

EGSM 900
 Receive (uplink) 880-915 MHz
 Transmit (downlink) 925-960 MHz
 174 Absolute Radio Frequency Channels (ARFCN)

GSM 1800 (DCS1800)

 Receive (uplink) 1710-1785 MHz
 Transmit (downlink) 1805-1880 MHz
 374 Absolute Radio Frequency Channels (ARFCN)

PCS 1900
 Receive (uplink) 1850-1910 MHz
 Transmit (downlink) 1930-1990 MHz
 299 Absolute Radio Frequency Channels (ARFCN)

ARFCN
 Bandwidth = 200 kHz
 8 TDMA timeslots

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 1-9

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Cell Size

Cell Size
The number of cells in any geographic area is determined by the number of MS subscribers who will
be operating in that area, and the geographic layout of the area (hills, lakes, buildings etc).

Large Cells
The maximum cell size for GSM is approximately 70 km in diameter, but this is dependent on the terrain
the cell is covering and the power class of the MS. In GSM, the MS can be transmitting anything up to 8
Watts; obviously, the higher the power output of the MS the larger the cell size. If the cell site is on top
of a hill, with no obstructions for miles, then the radio waves will travel much further than if the cell site
was in the middle of a city, with many high-rise buildings blocking the path of the radio waves.
Generally large cells are employed in:
• Remote areas.
• Coastal regions.
• Areas with few subscribers.
• Large areas which need to be covered with the minimum number of cell sites.

Small Cells
Small cells are used where there is a requirement to support a large number of MSs, in a
small geographic region, or where a low transmission power may be required to reduce the
effects of interference. Small cells currently cover 200 m and upwards.
Typical uses of small cells:
• Urban areas.
• Low transmission power required.
• High number of MSs.

The Trade Off - Large vs Small

There is no right answer when choosing the type of cell to use. Network providers would like to use
large cells to reduce installation and maintenance cost, but realize that to provide a quality service to
their customers, they have to consider many factors, such as terrain, transmission power required,
number of MSs etc. This inevitably leads to a mixture of both large and small cells.

1-10 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Cell Size Version Rev

Cell Size

Max 60- -70 km

Large cells

200 m+

Small cells

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 1-11

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Frequency Re-use

Frequency Re-use
Standard GSM has a total of 124 frequencies available for use in a network. Most network providers are
unlikely to be able to use all of these frequencies and are generally allocated a small subset of the 124.

Example:
A network provider has been allocated 48 frequencies to provide coverage over a
large area, let us take for example Great Britain.
As we have already seen, the maximum cell size is approximately 70 km in diameter, thus
our 48 frequencies would not be able to cover the whole of Britain.
To overcome this limitation the network provider must re-use the same frequencies over
and over again, in what is termed a "frequency re-use pattern".
When planning the frequency re-use pattern the network planner must take into account how often to
use the same frequencies and determine how close together the cells are, otherwise co-channel and/or
adjacent channel interference may occur. The network provider will also take into account the nature of
the area to be covered. This may range from a densely populated city (high frequency re-use, small
cells, high capacity) to a sparsely populated rural expanse (large omni cells, low re-use, low capacity).

Co-channel Interference
This occurs when RF carriers of the same frequency are transmitting in close proximity to each
other, the transmission from one RF carrier interferes with the other RF carrier.

Adjacent Channel Interference

This occurs when an RF source of a nearby frequency interferes with the RF carrier.

1-12 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Frequency Re-use Version Rev

Frequency Re-use

Frequency 1

Frequency 2

Frequency 1

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 1-13

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Sectorization

Sectorization
The cells we have looked at up to now are called omni-directional cells. That is each site has a single
cell and that cell has a single transmit antenna which radiates the radio waves to 360 degrees.
The problem with employing omni-directional cells is that as the number of MSs increases in the
same geographical region, we have to increase the number of cells to meet the demand. To do this,
as we have seen, we have to decrease the size of the cell and fit more cells into this geographical
area. Using omni-directional cells we can only go so far before we start introducing co-channel and
adjacent channel interference, both of which degrade the cellular network’s performance.
To gain a further increase in capacity within the geographic area we can employ a technique
called "sectorization". Sectorization splits a single site into a number of cells, each cell has
transmit and receive antennas and behaves as an independent cell.
Each cell uses special directional antennas to ensure that the radio propagation from one cell
is concentrated in a particular direction. This has a number of advantages: firstly, as we are
now concentrating all the energy from the cell in a smaller area 60, 120, 180 degrees instead of
360 degrees, we get a much stronger signal, which is beneficial in locations such as "in-building
coverage". Secondly, we can now use the same frequencies in a much closer re-use pattern, thus
allowing more cells in our geographic region which allows us to support more MSs.

1-14 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Sectorization Version Rev

Site Sectorization

360 Degree cells

Omni cell site

1 Transmit/receive
Site antenna

120 Degree sectors/cells

Cell

3 cell site
Cell Site 3 Transmit/receive
antenna
Cell

60 Degree sectors/cells

Cell

Cell Cell
6 cell site
Site 6 Transmit/receive
Cell Cell
antenna

Cell

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 1-15

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Using Sectored Sites

Using Sectored Sites

The distribution of RF carriers, and the size of the cells, is selected to achieve a balance between
avoiding co-channel interference by geographically separating cells using the same RF frequencies,
and achieving a channel density sufficient to satisfy the anticipated demand.
The diagram opposite illustrates how, by sectoring a site we can fit more cells into the same geographical
area, thus increasing the number of MS subscribers who can gain access and use the cellular network.
This sectorization of sites typically occurs in densely populated areas, or where a high demand
of MSs is anticipated, such as conference centres/business premises.

4 Site/3 Cell
A typical re-use pattern used in GSM planning is the 4 site/3 cell.
For example, the network provider has 36 frequencies available, and wishes to use the 4
site/3 cell re-use pattern he may split the frequencies up as follows:

Cell Cell Cell Cell Cell Cell Cell Cell Cell Cell Cell Cell
A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 C1 C2 C3 D1 D2 D3
1 5 9 2 6 10 3 7 11 4 8 12
13 17 21 14 18 22 15 19 23 16 20 24
25 29 33 26 30 34 27 31 35 28 32 36

In this configuration each cell has a total of 3 carriers and each site has a total of 9 carriers. If
the provider wished to reconfigure to a 3 site/3 cell then the result would be:

Cell Cell Cell Cell Cell B2 Cell B3 Cell C1 Cell C2 Cell C3

A1 A2 A3 B1
1 4 7 2 5 8 3 6 9
10 13 16 11 14 17 12 15 18
19 22 25 20 23 26 21 24 27
28 31 34 29 32 35 30 33 36

As can be seen from the table, each cell now has 4 carriers and each site has 12 carriers. This
has the benefit of supporting more subscribers in the same geographic region, but problems
could arise with co-channel and adjacent channel interference.

1-16 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Using Sectored Sites Version Rev

4 site/3 cell

A2

A1 A
A3 D2

D1 D
B2 D3 A2

B1 B A1 A
B3 C2 A3 D2

C1 C D1 D
A2 C3 B2 D3

A1 A B1 B
A3 D2 B3 C2

D1 D C1 C
B2 D3 C3

B1 B
B3 C2

C1 C
C3

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 1-17

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Switching and Control

Switching and Control

Having established radio coverage through the use of cells, both omni-directional and directional
(sectored sites), now consider what happens when the MS is in motion (as MSs tend to be).
At some point the MS will have to move from one cell’s coverage area to another cell’s coverage area.
Handovers from one cell to another could be for a number of reasons (e.g. the signal strength of the
"serving cell" is less than the signal strength of a "neighbour cell", or the MS is suffering a quality problem
in the serving cell) and by handing over to one of its neighbours this may stop the quality problem.
Regardless of the reason for a "handover" it has to be controlled by some entity, and in
GSM that entity is the Mobile services Switching Centre (MSC).
To perform a handover, the network must know which neighbour cell to hand the MS over to.
To ensure that we handover to the best possible candidate the MS performs measurements
of its surrounding neighbour cells and reports its findings to the network. These are then
analyzed together with the measurements that the network performs and a decision is made
on a regular basis as to the need for a handover. If a handover is required then the relevant
signal protocols are established and the handover is controlled by the MSC.
Handovers must be transparent to the MS subscriber. That is the subscriber should
be unaware that a handover has occurred.
As we will see later in this course, handovers are just one of the functions of the MSC, many
more are performed by the MSC and its associated entities (e.g. such as authentication
of MS, ciphering control, location updating, gateway to PSTN).
Note:
Some networks may allow certain handovers to be performed at the BSS level. This
would be dependent on the manufacturer’s equipment.

1-18 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Switching and Control Version Rev

Switching and Control

BTS
SITE
BSS
#1

BSS
MS #2
BTS
SITE BTS
SITE
MS
MS

BTS BTS
SITE SITE

BSC
SITE
WITH MS
XCDR

BTS BTS
SITE SITE

MS
BTS
BTS SITE
SITE
WITH
COLLOCATED
BSC
BSS BSS
#3 #5

BTS SITE MS BTS SITE

WITH WITH
COLLOCATED COLLOCATED
BSC & XCDR BSC
BSS
#4

RXCDR
BTS SITE
WITH
COLLOCATED
BSC

MSC MSC

PSTN/ISDN/PUBLICDATA NETWORK

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 1-19

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Switching and Control

This page intentionally left blank.

1-20 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Features of GSM Version Rev

Chapter 2

Features of GSM

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 2-1

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Features of GSM

This page intentionally left blank.

2-2 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Features of GSM Version Rev

Features of GSM
Section Objectives
On completion of this section the student will be able to:
• State the advantages of a digital air interface.
• State the implications of using standard open interfaces.
• Recognise the enhanced range of services that may be offered by a GSM network.
• State the part played by the mobile station in the handover process.
• State how software is used to provide flexibility.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 2-3

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Features of GSM

Features of GSM
Cellular telephone systems provide the MS subscriber and network provider with many advantages
over a standard telephone network, but there are still many drawbacks.

Compatibility
The rapid development of analogue cellular networks during the 1980s resulted in many
different cellular systems which were incompatible with one another.
The need for a common standard for mobile telecommunications was therefore
obvious, and so an executive body was set up to co-ordinate the complicated task
of specifying the new standardized network.
GSM has been specified and developed by many European countries working in
co-operation with each other. The result is a cellular system which has been implemented
throughout Europe and many parts of the world.
An additional advantage resulting from this is that there is a large market for GSM equipment. This
means that manufacturers can produce equipment in higher quantities and of better quality, and
also, due to the number of manufacturers, a competitive and aggressive pricing structure exists.
This results in lower costs for the MS subscriber and the network operators.

2-4 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Features of GSM Version Rev

Compatibility

RTMS

ITALY

PORTUGAL
GERMANY

U.K.
C- -450

SPAIN
TACS AUSTRIA NORWAY

SWITZERLAND
FINLAND

NETHERLANDS

FRANCE
DENMARK

SWEDEN

NMT
RADIOCOM 2000

GSM

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 2-5

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Noise Robust

Noise Robust
In cellular telephone systems, such as AMPs, TACs or NMT the MS communicates with the cell
site by means of analogue radio signals. Although this technique can provide an excellent audio
quality (it is widely used for stereo radio broadcasting, for example), it is vulnerable to noise, as
anyone who has tried to receive broadcast stereo with a poor aerial will testify!
The noise which interferes with the current system may be produced by any of the following sources:
• A powerful or nearby external source (a vehicle ignition system or a lightning bolt, perhaps);
• Another transmission on the same frequency (co-channel interference);
• Another transmission "breaking through" from a nearby frequency (adjacent channel interference);
• Background radio noise intruding because the required signal is too weak to exclude it.
In order to combat the problems caused by noise, GSM uses digital technology instead of analogue.
By using digital signals, we can manipulate the data and include sophisticated error protection, detection
and correction software. The overall result is that the signals passed across the GSM air interface
withstand more errors (that is, we can locate and correct more errors than current analogue systems).
Due to this feature, the GSM air interface in harsh RF environments can produce a usable signal, where
analogue systems would be unable to. This leads to better frequency re-use patterns and more capacity.

2-6 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Noise Robust Version Rev

Sources of Noise

Sources of Noise

Vehicle ignition systems

Lightning

Co-channel interference

Adjacent channel interference

Background spurious noise

GSM Answers

Digital interface

Interleaving

Error detection

Error correction

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 2-7

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Flexibility and Increased Capacity

Flexibility and Increased Capacity

With an analogue air interface, every connection between an MS and a cell site requires a separate
RF carrier, which in turn requires a separate set of RF hardware. In order to expand the capacity
of a cell site by a given number of channels, an equivalent quantity of hardware must be added.
This makes system expansion time consuming, expensive and labour intensive.
Re-configuration of an analogue site suffers similar problems since much of the equipment
requires manual re-tuning and this makes the system inflexible.
GSM equipment is fully controlled by its software. Network re-configurations can be made
quickly and easily with a minimum of manual intervention required. Also, since one carrier
can support eight users, expansion can be made with less equipment.
An enhancement soon to be realised is the half rate speech channel, where mobiles will use new speech
algorithms requiring half as much data to be sent over the air interface. By implementing half rate, one
carrier will be able to support 16 users, effectively doubling the capacity of the network. However, this is
the optimum since the mobile, as well as the BTS, will need to be modified to support half rate.
GSM networks also offer the flexibility of international roaming. This allows the mobile
user to travel to foreign countries and still use their mobiles on the foreign network. If
necessary, the user may leave their mobile equipment at home and carry only the SIM
card, making use of a hired mobile or any available equipment.
GSMs use of a digital air interface makes it more resilient to interference from users on
the same or nearby frequencies and so cells can be packed closer together, which means
more carriers in a given area to give better frequency re-use.
Multi-band networks and mobiles are available where a user can make use of both the 900
MHz network and the 1800/1900 networks. The mobile must be capable of operation in dual
frequency bands, however, to the user it will be transparent. This enables network operators to
add in capacity and reduce network interference by using cells operating in different frequency
bands. The operator will be required to show that they have made efficient use of their existing
frequencies before they will be granted access to frequencies in another band. This means
using techniques like sectorisation, microcells and frequency hopping.
GSM is highly software dependent and, although this makes it very complex, it
also provides for a high degree of flexibility.

2-8 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Flexibility and Increased Capacity Version Rev

Flexibility/Increased Capacity

Easily (RF) configured (software driven)

Half rate

International roaming

Better frequency re-use

Multi-band operation

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 2-9

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Use of Standardised Open Interfaces

Use of Standardised Open Interfaces

The equipment in each of the analogue cellular networks tends to be produced by one
manufacturer. This is because the equipment is only designed to communicate with other
equipment made by that manufacturer. This situation is very profitable for the manufacturers
as they have a great deal of influence over the pricing of their product. Unfortunately for
the MS user and the network provider, this means high prices.
The situation is very different with GSM, where standard interfaces such as C7 and X.25 are used
throughout the network. This means that network planners can select different manufacturers for
different pieces of hardware. Competition between manufacturers is therefore intense in the GSM
market and manufacturers must ensure they support the latest developments at a competitive price.
In addition, network planners have a great deal of flexibility in where the network components are
situated. This means that they can make the most efficient use of the terrestrial links which they operate.

2-10 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Use of Standardised Open Interfaces Version Rev

Use of Standardized Open Interfaces

G.703 IEEE 802.3

X.25 C7 LAP- -B

ISDN V.35

LAP-D

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 2-11

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Improved Security and Confidentiality

Improved Security and Confidentiality

Security figures high on the list of problems encountered by some operators of analogue systems. In
some systems, it is virtually non-existent and the unscrupulous were quick to recognize this. With some
of the "first generation" systems, it has been estimated that up to 20% of cellular phone calls are stolen.
Extensive measures have been taken, when specifying the GSM system, to substantially
increase security with regard to both call theft and equipment theft.
With GSM, both the Mobile Equipment (ME) and Mobile Subscriber are identified. The ME
has a unique number coded into it when it is manufactured. This can be checked against a
database every time the mobile makes a call to validate the actual equipment. The subscriber
is authenticated by use of a smart card known as a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM), again this
allows the network to check a MS subscriber against a database for authentication.
GSM also offers the capability to encrypt all signalling over the air interface. Different levels of
encryption are available to meet different subscriber/country requirements.
With the authentication processes for both the ME and subscriber, together with the
encryption and the digital encoding of the air interface signals, it makes it very difficult
for the casual "hacker" to listen-in to personal calls.
In addition to this, the GSM air interface supports frequency hopping; this entails each "burst" of
information being transmitted to/from the MS/base site on a different frequency, again making
it very difficult for an observer (hacker) to follow/listen to a specific call. Although it should be
noted that frequency hopping is employed to optimize network performance by overcoming
interference problems in busy areas, to increase call quality and capacity.

2-12 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Improved Security and Confidentiality Version Rev

Improved Security and Confidentiality

BSS

GSM Offers:
Encryption
ME authentication
Subscriber authentication (SIM)
"The Hacker" Frequency hopping

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 2-13

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Flexible Handover Processes

Flexible Handover Processes

Handovers take place as the MS moves between cells, gradually losing the RF
signal of one and gaining that of the other.
The MS switches from channel to channel and cell to cell as it moves to maintain call
continuity. With analogue systems, handovers are frequently a problem area and the
subscriber is often aware that a handover has occurred!
When GSM was specified a great deal of thought went into the design and implementation
of handovers. Although the GSM system is more complicated than analogue in this
area, the flexibility of the GSM handover processes offer significant improvements which
provide a much better quality of service to the subscriber.
GSM provides handover processes for the following:
• Quality (uplink/downlink).
• Interference (uplink/downlink).
• RF level (uplink/downlink).
• MS distance.
• Power budget.
More handover algorithms have been developed for specific applications, such as
microcellular, and are currently being implemented.

2-14 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Flexible Handover Processes Version Rev

Flexible Handover Processes

H/O

H/O

ROAD

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 2-15

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev ISDN Compatibility

ISDN Compatibility
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) is a standard that most developed countries are
committed to implement. This is a new and advanced telecommunications network designed
to carry voice and user data over standard telephone lines.
Major telephone companies in Europe, North America, Hong Kong, Australia and Japan
are committed to commercial enterprises using ISDN.
The GSM network has been designed to operate with the ISDN system and provides features which
are compatible with it. GSM can provide a maximum data rate of 9.6 kbit/s while ISDN provides
much higher data rates than this (standard rate 64 kbit/s, primary rate 2.048 Mbit/s).

2B+D
This refers to the signals and information which may be carried on an ISDN line. There are effectively
three connections, one for signalling (‘D’) and the other two for data or speech (‘2B’).

2-16 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
ISDN Compatibility Version Rev

ISDN Compatibility

PSTN

ISDN
2B + D

Note:

1. B= 64 kbit/s
2. D= 16 kbit/s
2B+D = 144 kbit/s

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 2-17

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Enhanced Range Of Services

Enhanced Range Of Services

GSM has the potential to offer a greatly enhanced range of services compared to existing
analogue cellular systems. As well as a full range of data transmission options and fax,
there will be a wide range of supplementary services.
The basic call services which are already provided within analogue systems such as Call
Forwarding, Voice Message Services etc, are already available in some operational systems.
Whether these services and others are provided as part of the basic service or at additional
cost to the subscriber will depend on the network provider.
When services were specified on GSM, the current land PSTN and ISDN system had to be taken into
consideration; after all it is these systems we are most likely to be communicating with.
The services available to a subscriber will be determined by three factors:
• The level of service provided by the network provider.
• The level of service purchased by the subscriber.
• The capabilities of the subscriber’s mobile equipment.

2-18 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Enhanced Range Of Services Version Rev

Enhanced Range of Services

Offered by network provider

Purchased by subscriber

Capabilities of mobile equipment

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 2-19

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Enhanced Range Of Services

Speech Services
The following services listed involve the transmission of speech information and would
make up the basic service offered by a network provider:

Telephony
Provides for normal MS originated/terminated voice calls.

Emergency Calls (with/without SIM Card inserted in MS)

The number "112" has been agreed as the international emergency call number. This should place you
in contact with the emergency services (Police, Fire, Ambulance) whichever country you are in.

Short Message Service Point To Point

Provides the transmission of an acknowledged short message (128 bytes maximum) from a service
centre to a MS. It is also intended that the MS should be able to send short messages to land-based
equipment. This will obviously depend upon the equipment owned by the land-based user.

Short Message Cell Broadcast

Provides the transmission of an unacknowledged short message (75 bytes maximum) from
a service centre in the fixed network to all MSs within one cell. This may carry information
from the network provider, for example traffic information or advertising.

Advanced Message Handling Service

Provides message submission and delivery from the storage from a public Message
Handling System (MHS) for example, electronic mail.

Dual Personal and Business Numbers

Permits the allocation of dual telephone numbers to a single subscriber. This will allow calls
to be made and be billed either to ‘‘business" or ‘‘personal" numbers.

2-20 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Enhanced Range Of Services Version Rev

Speech Services

Telephony

Emergency calls

Short message services

Dual personal and business numbers

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 2-21

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Enhanced Range Of Services

Data Services
Data can be sent over the air using some of the present systems, but this requires specially designed
"add ons" to protect the data content in the harsh environment of the air interface.
Special provision is made in the GSM technical specifications for data transmission. Therefore,
like ISDN, GSM is "specially designed" for data transmission. GSM can be considered
as an extension of ISDN into the wireless environment.
Text files, images, messages and fax may all be sent over the GSM network. The data
rates available are 2.4 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s and 9.6 kbit/s.
In addition to supporting data transmission, GSM also provides for Group 3 Fax transmission.

2-22 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Enhanced Range Of Services Version Rev

Data Services

Raw Data:

9.6 kbit/s

4.8 kbit/s

2.4 kbit/s

Fax

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 2-23

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Enhanced Range Of Services

Supplementary Services
A supplementary service is a modification of, or a supplement to, a basic telecommunication
service. The network provider will probably charge extra for these services or use
them as an incentive to join their network.
Here is a list of some of the optional supplementary subscriber services that
could be offered to GSM subscribers:

Number Identification
• Receiving party requests calling number to be shown.
• Calling party requests calling number not to be shown.

Call Barring
• Bar all incoming or all outgoing calls.
• Bar specific incoming or outgoing calls.

Call Forwarding
• Forward all calls.
• Forward calls when subscriber is busy.
• Forward calls if subscriber does not answer.
• Forward calls if subscriber cannot be located.

Call Completion
• Enable incoming call to wait until subscriber completes current call.
• Enable subscriber to place incoming calls on hold.

Charging
• Display current cost of call.

Multi-party
• Three party service.
• Conference calling.

2-24 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Enhanced Range Of Services Version Rev

Supplementary Services

Number identification

Call barring

Call forwarding

Call completion

Charging

Multi-party

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 2-25

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Enhanced Range Of Services

This page intentionally left blank.

2-26 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Network Components Version Rev

Chapter 3

GSM Network Components

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-1

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Network Components

This page intentionally left blank.

3-2 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Network Components Version Rev

GSM Network Components

Section Objectives
On completion of this section the student will be able to:
• Name the major components of a GSM network and state the functionality of these components.
• Draw a diagram illustrating how the components of the GSM network are connected.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-3

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Network Overview

GSM Network Overview

The diagram opposite shows a simplified GSM network. Each network component is illustrated only
once, however, many of the components will occur several times throughout a network.
Each network component is designed to communicate over an interface specified by the
GSM standards. This provides flexibility and enables a network provider to utilize system
components from different manufacturers. For example Motorola Base Station System (BSS)
equipment may be coupled with an Ericsson Network Switching System.
The principle component groups of a GSM network are:
• The Mobile Station (MS)
This consists of the mobile telephone, fax machine etc. This is the part of the
network that the subscriber will see.
• The Base Station System (BSS)
This is the part of the network which provides the radio interconnection from the
MS to the land-based switching equipment.
• The Network Switching System
This consists of the Mobile services Switching Centre (MSC) and its associated system-control
databases and processors together with the required interfaces. This is the part which provides for
interconnection between the GSM network and the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).
• The Operations and Maintenance System
This enables the network provider to configure and maintain the network from a central location.

3-4 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Network Overview Version Rev

GSM Network Components

Operations and Network Switching System

Maintenance System

NMC

VLR
HLR

OMC AUC

EIR

MSC

PSTN EC IWF

XCDR

ME
BSC

SIM BTS

Mobile Station Base Station System

Interface/Connection

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-5

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Mobile Station (MS)

Mobile Station (MS)

The MS consists of two parts, the Mobile Equipment (ME) and an electronic ‘smart
card’ called a Subscriber Identity module (SIM).
The ME is the hardware used by the subscriber to access the network. The hardware has an identity
number associated with it, which is unique for that particular device and permanently stored in it. This
identity number is called the International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) and enables the network
operator to identify mobile equipment which may be causing problems on the system.
The SIM is a card which plugs into the ME. This card identifies the MS subscriber and also provides
other information regarding the service that subscriber should receive. The subscriber is identified
by an identity number called the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI).
Mobile Equipment may be purchased from any store but the SIM must be obtained from the GSM
network provider. Without the SIM inserted, the ME will only be able to make emergency calls.
By making a distinction between the subscriber identity and the ME identity, GSM can route calls and
perform billing based on the identity of the ‘subscriber’ rather than the equipment or its location.

3-6 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Mobile Station (MS) Version Rev

Mobile Station

MS

Mobile Station (MS)

Mobile Equipment (ME)
Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-7

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Mobile Equipment (ME)

Mobile Equipment (ME)

The ME is the only part of the GSM network which the subscriber will really see. There
are three main types of ME, these are listed below:
• Vehicle Mounted
These devices are mounted in a vehicle and the antenna is physically mounted
on the outside of the vehicle.
• Portable Mobile Unit
This equipment can be handheld when in operation, but the antenna is not
connected to the handset of the unit.
• Handportable Unit
This equipment comprises of a small telephone handset not much bigger than a
calculator. The antenna is be connected to the handset.
The ME is capable of operating at a certain maximum power output dependent on its type and use.
These mobile types have distinct features which must be known by the network, for example
their maximum transmission power and the services they support. The ME is therefore identified
by means of a classmark. The classmark is sent by the ME in its initial message.
The following pieces of information are held in the classmark:
• Revision Level -
Identifies the phase of the GSM specifications that the mobile complies with.
• RF Power Capability -
The maximum power the MS is able to transmit, used for power control and handover
preparation. This information is held in the mobile power class number.
• Ciphering Algorithm -
Indicates which ciphering algorithm is implemented in the MS. There is only one algorithm (A5)
in GSM phase 1, but GSM phase 2 specifies different algorithms (A5/0-A5/7).
• Frequency Capability -
Indicates the frequency bands the MS can receive and transmit on. Currently all GSM MSs use one
frequency band, in the future this band will be extended but not all MSs will be capable of using it.
• Short Message Capability -
Indicates whether the MS is able to receive short messages.

3-8 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Mobile Equipment (ME) Version Rev

Mobile Equipment Capabilies

RF power capability

Power class Power output

1 20 Watts (deleted)
2 8 Watts
3 5 Watts
4 2 Watts
5 0.8 Watts

Support of Phase 1, Phase 2 or Phase 2+

specification

Encryption capability

Frequency capability

Short message services capability

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-9

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

The SIM as mentioned previously is a "smart card" which plugs into the ME and contains information
about the MS subscriber hence the name Subscriber Identity Module.
The SIM contains several pieces of information:
• International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)
This number identifies the MS subscriber. It is only transmitted over the air during initialization.
• Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity (TMSI)
This number identifies the subscriber, it is periodically changed by the system management to
protect the subscriber from being identified by someone attempting to monitor the radio interface.
• Location Area Identity (LAI)
Identifies the current location of the subscriber.
• Subscriber Authentication Key (Ki)
This is used to authenticate the SIM card.
• Mobile Station International Services Digital Network (MSISDN)
This is the telephone number of the mobile subscriber. It is comprised of a country
code, a network code and a subscriber number.
Most of the data contained within the SIM is protected against reading (Ki) or alterations (IMSI). Some
of the parameters (LAI) will be continuously updated to reflect the current location of the subscriber.
The SIM card, and the high degree of inbuilt system security, provide protection of the subscriber’s
information and protection of networks against fraudulent access. SIM cards are designed to be
difficult to duplicate. The SIM can be protected by use of Personal Identity Number (PIN) password,
similar to bank/credit charge cards, to prevent unauthorized use of the card.
The SIM is capable of storing additional information such as accumulated call charges. This
information will be accessible to the customer via handset/keyboard key entry.
The SIM also executes the Authentication Algorithm.

3-10 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Version Rev

Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

SIM CARD
(credit card size)

FULL SIZE SIM CARD

MINI SIM CARD

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-11

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Base Station System (BSS)

Base Station System (BSS)

The GSM Base Station System is the equipment located at a cell site. It comprises a combination
of digital and RF equipment. The BSS provides the link between the MS and the MSC.
The BSS communicates with the MS over the digital air interface and with the MSC via 2 Mbit/s links.
The BSS consists of three major hardware components:
• The Base Transceiver Station - BTS
The BTS contains the RF components that provide the air interface for a particular
cell. This is the part of the GSM network which communicates with the MS. The
antenna is included as part of the BTS.
• The Base Station Controller - BSC
The BSC as its name implies provides the control for the BSS. The BSC communicates
directly with the MSC. The BSC may control single or multiple BTSs.
• The Transcoder - XCDR
The Transcoder is used to compact the signals from the MS so that they are more
efficiently sent over the terrestrial interfaces. Although the transcoder is considered to be
a part of the BSS, it is very often located closer to the MSC.
The transcoder is used to reduce the rate at which the traffic (voice/data) is transmitted over
the air interface. Although the transcoder is part of the BSS, it is often found physically
closer to the NSS to allow more efficient use of the terrestrial links.

3-12 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Base Station System (BSS) Version Rev

Base Station System (BSS)

XCDR
BSS

BSC

BTS BTS BTS

BTS

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-13

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Base Station Controller (BSC)

Base Station Controller (BSC)

As previously mentioned, the BSC provides the control for the BSS. The functions
of the BSC are shown in the table opposite.
Any operational information required by the BTS will be received via the BSC. Likewise any information
required about the BTS (by the OMC for example) will be obtained by the BSC.
The BSC incorporates a digital switching matrix, which it uses to connect the radio channels
on the air interface with the terrestrial circuits from the MSC.
The BSC switching matrix also allows the BSC to perform "handovers" between radio
channels on BTSs, under its control, without involving the MSC.

Base Transceiver Station - BTS

The BTS provides the air interface connection with the MS. I also has a limited amount of control
functionality which reduces the amount of traffic passing between the BTS and BSC. The functions
of the BTS are shown opposite. Each BTS will support 1 or more cells.

BSS Functionality Control

Terrestrial Channel Management
Channel Allocation BSC
Radio Channel Management BSC
Channel Configuration Management BSC
Handover Contro BSC

Frequency Hopping BSC/BTS

Traffic Channel Management BSC/BTS
Control Channel Management BSC/BTS
Encryption BSC/BTS
Paging BSC/BTS
Power Control BSC/BTS

Channel Coding/Decoding BTS

Timing Advance BTS
Idle Channel Observation BTS
Measurement Reporting BTS

Where the BSC and BTS are both shown to control a function, the control is divided
between the two, or may be located wholly at one.

3-14 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Base Station Controller (BSC) Version Rev

Base Station System

BSC

Controls one or more BTSs.

Switches traffic and signalling to/from

the BTSs and the MSC.

Connects terrestrial circuits and channels

on the air interface.

Controls handovers performed by BTSís

under its control.

BTS

Contains RF hardware.

Limited control functionality.

Supports 1 or more cells.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-15

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev BSS Configurations

BSS Configurations
As we have mentioned, a BSC may control several BTSs, the maximum number of BTSs
which may be controlled by one BSC is not specified by GSM.
Individual manufacturer’s specifications may vary greatly.
The BTSs and BSC may either be located at the same cell site "co-located", or located at different sites
"Remote". In reality most BTSs will be remote, as there are many more BTSs than BSCs in a network.
Another BSS configuration is the daisy chain. A BTS need not communicate directly with the
BSC which controls it, it can be connected to the BSC via a chain of BTSs.
Daisy chaining reduces the amount of cabling required to set up a network as a BTS can be
connected to its nearest BTS rather than all the way to the BSC.
Problems may arise when chaining BTSs, due to the transmission delay through the
chain. The length of the chain must, therefore, be kept sufficiently short to prevent
the round trip speech delay becoming too long.
Other topologies are also permitted, including stars and loops. Loops are used to introduce
redundancy into the network, for example if a BTS connection was lost, the BTS may still be
able to communicate with the BSC if a second connection is available.

3-16 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
BSS Configurations Version Rev

BSS Configurations

Cell Site
Co-located BSS BTS

Cell Site
Remote BTS
BSC BTS

BSC BTS

Cell Site
BTS

BTS
BTS

BTS

Daisy Chained BTS

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-17

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Transcoder (XCDR)

Transcoder (XCDR)
The Transcoder (XCDR) is required to convert the speech or data output from the MSC (64 kbit/s
PCM), into the form specified by GSM specifications for transmission over the air interface, that
is, between the BSS and MS (64 kbit/s to 16 kbit/s and vice versa).
The 64 kbit/s Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) circuits from the MSC, if transmitted on the air
interface without modification, would occupy an excessive amount of radio bandwidth. This
would use the available radio spectrum inefficiently. The required bandwidth is therefore
reduced by processing the 64 kbit/s circuits so that the amount of information required
to transmit digitized voice falls to a gross rate of 16 kbit/s.
The transcoding function may be located at the MSC, BSC, or BTS.
The content of the 16 kbit/s data depends on the coding algorithm used. There are two
speech coding algorithms available and selecting which one to use depends on the capabilities
of the mobile equipment and the network configuration.
The Full Rate speech algorithm is supported by all mobiles and networks. It produces 13 kbit/s of coded
speech data plus 3 kbit/s of control data which is commonly referred to as TRAU data (Transcoder
Rate Adaption Unit). The TRAU data on the downlink will be used by the BTS and therefore removed
from the 13 k of speech data before transmission on the air interface. the 13 kbit/s of speech data is
processed at the BTS to form a gross rate of 22.8 kbit/s on the air interface which includes forward error
correction. In the uplink direction the BTS adds in TRAU data which will be used by the transcoder.
Enhanced Full Rate is an improved speech coding algorithm and is only supported by Phase 2+
mobiles and is optional in the Network. It produces 12.2 kbit/s from each 64 kbit/s PCM channel. The
TRAU data in this case is made up to 3.8 kbit/s to keep the channel rate to and from the BTS at 16
kbit/s as for Full Rate. As with Full Rate the TRAU data is used at the BTS and Transcoder.
For data transmissions the data is not transcoded but data rate adapted from 9.6 kbit/s (4.8
kbit/s or 2.4 kbit/s may also be used) up to a gross rate of 16 kbit/s for transmission over the
terrestrial interfaces, again this 16 kbit/s contains a 3 kbit/s TRAU.
As can be seen from the diagram opposite, although the reason for transcoding was to reduce the data
rate over the air interface, the number of terrestrial links is also reduced approximately on a 4:1 ratio.

3-18 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Transcoder (XCDR) Version Rev

Transcoder
TCH
TCH
TCH

TCH
SIG
0 31

1 TCH= 64 kbit/s 1 TCH= 16 kbit/s

30 TCH
120 GSM TRAFFIC CHANNELS
30 TCH

MSC 30 TCH XCDR BSS

1 X 2 Mbit/s LINK
30 TCH
4 x 2 Mbit/s
LINKS

TCH TCH TCH TCH

Transcoded information from four calls

(4 x 16 kbit/s submultiplexed into one 64 kbit/s channel)

0 11 6 3
(C7)
Information Control

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-19

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Network Switching System

Network Switching System

The Network Switching System includes the main switching functions of the GSM network. It also
contains the databases required for subscriber data and mobility management. Its main function is to
manage communications between the GSM network and other telecommunications networks.
The components of the Network Switching System are listed below:
• Mobile Services Switching Centre - MSC
• Home Location Register - HLR
• Visitor Location Register - VLR
• Equipment Identity Register - EIR
• Authentication Centre - AUC
• InterWorking Function - IWF
• Echo Canceller - EC
In addition to the more traditional elements of a cellular telephone system, GSM has Location
Register network entities. These entities are the Home Location Register (HLR), Visitor
Location Register (VLR), and the Equipment Identity Register (EIR). The location registers are
database-oriented processing nodes which address the problems of managing subscriber data
and keeping track of a MSs location as it roams around the network.
Functionally, the Interworking Function and the Echo Cancellers may be considered as
parts of the MSC, since their activities are inextricably linked with those of the switch as
it connects speech and data calls to and from the MSs.

3-20 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Network Switching System Version Rev

The Network Switching System

Network Switching System

VLR
HLR
Operations
and AUC
Maintenance System
EIR

MSC

PSTN EC IWF

BSS

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-21

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Mobile Services Switching Centre (MSC)

Mobile Services Switching Centre (MSC)

The MSC is included in the GSM system for call-switching. Its overall purpose is
the same as that of any telephone exchange.
However, because of the additional complications involved in the control and security aspects
of the GSM cellular system and the wide range of subscriber facilities that it offers, the
MSC has to be capable of fulfilling many additional functions.
The MSC will carry out several different functions depending upon its position in the
network. When the MSC provides the interface between the PSTN and the BSSs in
the GSM network it will be known as a Gateway MSC. In this position it will provide the
switching required for all MS originated or terminated traffic.
Each MSC provides service to MSs located within a defined geographic coverage area, the network
typically contains more than one MSC. One MSC is capable of supporting a regional capital with
approximately one million inhabitants. An MSC of this size will be contained in about half a dozen racks.
The functions carried out by the MSC are listed below:
• Call Processing
Includes control of data/voice call setup, inter-BSS and inter-MSC handovers and control
of mobility management (subscriber validation and location).
• Operations and Maintenance Support
Includes database management, traffic metering and measurement, and a man-machine interface.
• Internetwork Interworking
Manages the interface between the GSM network and the PSTN.
• Billing
Collects call billing data.

3-22 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Mobile Services Switching Centre (MSC) Version Rev

Mobile Service Switching Centre

Call processing

Operations & maintenance

Internetwork interworking

Billing

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-23

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Home Location Register (HLR)

Home Location Register (HLR)

The HLR is the reference database for subscriber parameters.
Various identification numbers and addresses are stored, as well as authentication
parameters. This information is entered into the database by the network provider
when a new subscriber is added to the system.
The parameters stored in the HLR are listed opposite:
The HLR database contains the master database of all the subscribers to a GSM PLMN. The data
it contains is remotely accessed by all the MSCs and the VLRs in the network and, although the
network may contain more than one HLR, there is only one database record per subscriber - each
HLR is therefore handling a portion of the total subscriber database. The subscriber data may
be accessed by either the IMSI or the MSISDN number. The data can also be accessed by an
MSC or a VLR in a different PLMN, to allow inter-system and inter-country roaming.

3-24 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Home Location Register (HLR) Version Rev

Home Location Register (HLR)

Subscriber ID (IMSI and MSISDN)

Current subscriber VLR (current location)

Supplementary services subscribed to

Supplementary service information (e.g.

current forwarding number)

Subscriber status (registered/deregistered)

Authentication key and AUC functionality

Mobile Subscriber Roaming Number

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-25

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Visitor Location Register (VLR)

Visitor Location Register (VLR)

The VLR contains a copy of most of the data stored at the HLR. It is, however, temporary
data which exists for only as long as the subscriber is "active" in the particular area covered
by the VLR. The VLR database will therefore contain some duplicate data as well as more
precise data relevant to the subscriber remaining within the VLR coverage.
The VLR provides a local database for the subscribers wherever they are physically located
within a PLMN, this may or may not be the "home" system. This function eliminates the need
for excessive and time-consuming references to the "home" HLR database.
The additional data stored in the VLR is listed below:
• Mobile status (busy/free/no answer etc.).
• Location Area Identity (LAI).
• Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity (TMSI).
• Mobile Station Roaming Number (MSRN).

Location Area Identity

Cells within the Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) are grouped together into geographical areas.
Each area is assigned a Location Area Identity (LAI), a location area may typically contain 30 cells.
Each VLR controls several LAIs and as a subscriber moves from one LAI to another, the LAI is updated
in the VLR. As the subscriber moves from one VLR to another, the VLR address is updated at the HLR.

Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity

The VLR controls the allocation of new Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity (TMSI) numbers
and notifies them to the HLR. The TMSI will be updated frequently, this makes it very difficult
for the call to be traced and therefore provides a high degree of security for the subscriber.
The TMSI may be updated in any of the following situations:
• Call setup.
• On entry to a new LAI.
• On entry to a new VLR.

Mobile Subscriber Roaming Number

As a subscriber may wish to operate outside its "home" system at some time, the VLR can
also allocate a Mobile Station Roaming Number (MSRN). This number is assigned from
a list of numbers held at the VLR (MSC). The MSRN is then used to route the call to the
MSC which controls the base station in the MSs current location.
The database in the VLR can be accessed by the IMSI, the TMSI or the MSRN.
Typically there will be one VLR per MSC.

3-26 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Visitor Location Register (VLR) Version Rev

Visitor Location Register

Mobile Status

Location Area Identity ( LAI )

Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity (TMSI )

Mobile Station Roaming Number (MSRN )

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-27

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Equipment Identity Register (EIR)

Equipment Identity Register (EIR)

The EIR contains a centralized database for validating the International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI).
This database is concerned solely with MS equipment and not with the subscriber
who is using it to make or receive a call.
The EIR database consists of lists of IMEIs (or ranges of IMEIs) organized as follows:
• White List
Contains those IMEIs which are known to have been assigned to valid MS equipment.
• Black List
Contains IMEIs of MS which have been reported stolen or which are to be
denied service for some other reason.
• Grey List
Contains IMEIs of MS which have problems (for example, faulty software). These are
not, however, sufficiently significant to warrant a ‘‘black listing".
The EIR database is remotely accessed by the MSCs in the network and can also
be accessed by an MSC in a different PLMN.
As in the case of the HLR, a network may well contain more than one EIR with each EIR controlling
certain blocks of IMEI numbers. The MSC contains a translation facility, which when given an IMEI,
returns the address of the EIR controlling the appropriate section of the equipment database.

3-28 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Equipment Identity Register (EIR) Version Rev

Call Processing Functions (EIR)

IMEI
(International Mobile Equipment Identification)
(checked against White List)

If NOT found,
checked against
'Grey/Black' List

IMEI

(checked against Black/Grey List)

If found, returns a 'Black' or 'Grey' List

indicator as appropriate

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-29

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Authentication Centre (AUC)

Authentication Centre (AUC)

The AUC is a processor system, it performs the "authentication" function.
It will normally be co-located with the Home Location Register (HLR) as it will be required to
continuously access and update, as necessary, the system subscriber records. The AUC/HLR
centre can be co-located with the MSC or located remote from the MSC.
The authentication process will usually take place each time the subscriber "initializes" on the system.

Authentication Process
To discuss the authentication process we will assume that the VLR has all the information
required to perform that authentication process (Kc, SRES and RAND). If this information
is unavailable, then the VLR would request it from the HLR/AUC.
1. Triples (Kc, SRES and RAND) are stored at the VLR.
2. The VLR sends RAND via the MSC and BSS, to the MS (unencrypted).
3. The MS, using the A3 and A8 algorithms and the parameter Ki stored on the MS SIM card,
together with the received RAND from the VLR, calculates the values of SRES and Kc.
4. The MS sends SRES unencrypted to the VLR
5. Within the VLR the value of SRES is compared with the SRES received from the mobile.
If the two values match, then the authentication is successful.
6. If cyphering is to be used, Kc from the assigned triple is passed to the BTS.
7. The mobile calculates Kc from the RAND and A8 and Ki on the SIM.
8. Using Kc, A5 and the GSM hyperframe number, encryption between the MS and
the BSS can now occur over the air interface.
Note: The triples are generated at the AUC by:

RAND = Randomly generated number.

SRES = Derived from A3 (RAND, Ki).
Kc = Derived from A8 (RAND, Ki).
A3 = From 1 of 16 possible algorithms defined on allocation of IMSI and creation of SIM card.
A8 = From 1 of 16 possible algorithms defined on allocation of IMSI and creation of SIM card.
Ki = Authentication key, assigned at random together with the versions of A3 and A8.

The first time a subscriber attempts to make a call, the full authentication process takes place.
However, for subsequent calls attempted within a given system control time period, or
within a single system provider’s network, authentication may not be necessary, as the data
generated during the first authentication will still be available.

3-30 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Authentication Centre (AUC) Version Rev

Authentication Process

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-31

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Interworking Function (IWF)

Interworking Function (IWF)

The IWF provides the function to enable the GSM system to interface with the various
forms of public and private data networks currently available.
The basic features of the IWF are listed below.
• Data rate adaption.
• Protocol conversion.
Some systems require more IWF capability than others, this depends upon the
network to which it is being connected.
The IWF also incorporates a ‘‘modem bank", which may be used when, for example, the GSM Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) exchanges data with a land DTE connected via an analogue modem.

3-32 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Interworking Function (IWF) Version Rev

Interworking Function

Network Switching System

VLR
HLR
Operations
and
Maintenance System AUC

EIR

MSC

PSTN EC IWF

BSS

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-33

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Echo Canceller (EC)

Echo Canceller (EC)

An EC is used on the PSTN side of the MSC for all voice circuits. Echo control is required
at the switch because the inherent GSM system delay can cause an unacceptable echo
condition, even on short distance PSTN circuit connections.
The total round trip delay introduced by the GSM system (the cumulative delay caused by call
processing, speech encoding and decoding etc) is approximately 180 mS. This would not be
apparent to the MS subscriber, but for the inclusion of a 2-wire to 4-wire hybrid transformer in the
circuit. This is required at the land party’s local switch because the standard telephone connection
is 2-wire. The transformer causes the echo. This does not affect the land subscriber.
During a normal PSTN land to land call, no echo is apparent because the delay is too short
and the user is unable to distinguish between the echo and the normal telephone "side tone".
However, without the EC and with the GSM round trip delay added, the effect would be very
irritating to the MS subscriber, disrupting speech and concentration.
The standard EC will provide cancellation of up to 68 milliseconds on the "tail circuit" (the tail
circuit is the connection between the output of the EC and the land telephone).

'LAND SIDE' 'MOBILE SIDE'

4-Wire (Rx)
2-Wire

Tx/Rx (Tx)
Echo

Hybrid

3-34 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Echo Canceller (EC) Version Rev

Echo Canceller

Network Switching System

VLR
HLR
Operations
and
OMS AUC
Maintenance System
EIR

MSC

PSTN EC IWF

BSS

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-35

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Operations and Maintenance System

Operations and Maintenance System

Overview
The operations and maintenance system provides the capability to manage the GSM network remotely.
This area of the GSM network is not currently tightly specified by the GSM specifications,
it is left to the network provider to decide what capabilities they wish it to have. The
Operations and Maintenance System comprises of two parts:

Network Management Centre (NMC)

The Network Management Centre (NMC) has a view of the entire PLMN and is responsible
for the management of the network as a whole. The NMC resides at the top of the
hierarchy and provides global network management.

Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC)

The Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC) is a centralized facility that supports the
day to day management of a cellular network as well as providing a database for long
term network engineering and planning tools. An OMC manages a certain area of the
PLMN thus giving regionalized network management.

3-36 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Operations and Maintenance System Version Rev

Operations & Maintenance System

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-37

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Network Management Centre (NMC)

Network Management Centre (NMC)

The NMC offers the ability to provide hierarchical regionalized network management
of a complete GSM system.
It is responsible for operations and maintenance at the network level, supported by the
OMCs which are responsible for regional network management.
The NMC is therefore a single logical facility at the top of the network management hierarchy.
The NMC has a high level view of the network, as a series of network nodes and
interconnecting communications facilities. The OMC, on the other hand, is used to filter
information from the network equipment for forwarding to the NMC, thus allowing it to focus
on issues requiring national co-ordination. The NMC can also co-ordinate issues regarding
interconnection to other networks, for example the PSTN.
The NMC can take regional responsibility when an OMC is not manned, with the OMC
acting as a transit point between the NMC and the network equipment. The NMC provides
operators with functions equivalent to those available at the OMC.

Functionality of the NMC

Monitors nodes on the network

Monitors GSM network element statistics

Monitors OMC regions & provides information to

OMC staff

Passes on statistical information from one OMC

region to another to improve problem solving
strategies

Enables long term planning for the entire network

3-38 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Network Management Centre (NMC) Version Rev

Network Management Centre

NMC
Q3 PROTOCOL
(GSM 12 SERIES)

OMC OMC

OMC

REGION 2 REGION 3

REGION 1

NETWORK

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-39

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC)

Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC)

The OMC provides a central point from which to control and monitor the other network entities (i.e. base
stations, switches, database, etc) as well as monitor the quality of service being provided by the network.
At present, equipment manufacturers have their own OMCs which are not compatible in every aspect
with those of other manufacturers. This is particularly the case between radio base station equipment
suppliers, where in some cases the OMC is a separate item and Digital Switching equipment
suppliers, where the OMC is an integral, but functionally separate, part of the hardware.
There are two types of OMC these are:
• OMC (R)
OMC controls specifically the Base Station System.
• OMC (S)
OMC controls specifically the Network Switching System.
The OMC should support the following functions as per ITS-TS recommendations:
• Event/Alarm Management.
• Fault Management.
• Performance Management.
• Configuration Management.
• Security Management.
The OMC functional architecture is illustrated in the diagram opposite.

3-40 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC) Version Rev

OMC Functional Architecture

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-41

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev The Network In Reality

The Network In Reality

In reality a GSM network is much more complicated than we have seen. The diagram opposite illustrates
how multiple BSS and Network Switching System components will be connected within a network.
A typical city for example, London) will have approximately the following number of network components:

Network Component Quantity

Operations and Maintenance Centre (Base 1
Station Equipment) - OMC(R)
Operations and Maintenance Centre (Switching) 1
- OMC(S)
Mobile Services Switching Centre - MSC/VLR 1-2
Base Station Controller - BSC 5-15
Base Transceiver Station - BTS 200-400

A typical network (for example, UK) will have approximately the following number of network components.

Network Component Quantity

Operations and Maintenance Centre (Base 6
Station Equipment) - OMC(R)
Operations and Maintenance Centre (Switching) 6
- OMC(S)
Mobile Services Switching Centre - MSC/VLR 6
Base Station Controller - BSC 40+
Base Transceiver Station - BTS 1200+

3-42 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
The Network In Reality Version Rev

GSM Network Components

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 3-43

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev The Network In Reality

This page intentionally left blank.

3-44 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Terrestrial Interfaces Version Rev

Chapter 4

GSM Terrestrial Interfaces

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 4-1

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Terrestrial Interfaces

This page intentionally left blank.

4-2 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Terrestrial Interfaces Version Rev

GSM Terrestrial Interfaces

Section Objectives
On completion of this course the student will be able to:
• Identify the protocols used on the terrestrial interfaces between the GSM system entities.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 4-3

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Introduction

Introduction
The terrestrial interfaces comprise all the connections between the GSM system
entities, apart from the Um, or air interface.
They are represented on the diagram opposite by the lines that connect the various entities together.
The GSM terrestrial interfaces and message-transport mediums all conform to ITU-TSS
specifications widely used throughout the world. As we stated previously, it is from this use
of standardized interfaces that the flexibility of GSM largely derives.
The terrestrial interfaces transport the traffic across the system and allow the passage of
the thousands of data messages necessary to make the system function. They transport
the data for software downloads and uploads, the collection of statistical information and
the implementation of operations and maintenance commands.
The standard interfaces used are as follows:
• 2 Mbit/s.
• Signalling System ITU-TSS #7 ("C7" or ‘‘SS#7").
• X.25 (packet switched data); (LAPB).
• A bis using the LAPD protocol (Link Access Procedure "D").
Whatever the interfaces and whatever their function, they will often share a common physical
bearer (cable) between two points, for example, the MSC and a BSS.

OSI LAYERS

4-7 X.25 C7
User Applications Applications
Application
3
Network X.25 ABIS
MTP (C7)
2
Link LAPB LAPD

1 2 Mbit/s T runk
Physical

4-4 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Introduction Version Rev

The GSM System

NMC

VLR VLR
HLR

BSS XC AUC
OMC

EIR

MSC MSC

XC IWF EC EC IWF XC
MS

BSC

BTS BSC BTS

BTS BTS BTS

BTS
PSTN

BTS BTS

BTS

MS
BTS

MS

CO- LOCATED ENTITIES

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 4-5

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev 2 Mbit/s Trunk

2 Mbit/s Trunk
This diagram opposite shows the logical GSM system with the 2 Mbit/s interfaces highlighted.
They carry traffic from the PSTN to the MSC, between MSCs, from an MSC to a BSC and from
a BSC to remotely sited BTSs. These links are also used between the MSC and IWF.
Each 2.048 Mbit/s link provides thirty 64 kbit/s channels available to carry
speech, data, or control information.
The control information may contain C7, LAPD or X.25 formatted information.
These 2 Mbit/s links commonly act as the physical bearer for the interfaces used
between the GSM system entities.

Typical Configuration

TS0 TS 1-15 TS 16 TS 17-31

TX # Used For
0 Frame Alignment/ Error Checking/ Signalling/
Alarms
1-15 Traffic
16 Signalling (other TS may also be used)
17-31 Timeslot

4-6 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2 Mbit/s Trunk Version Rev

2 Mbit/s Trunks

NMC

VLR VLR
HLR

BSS XC AUC
OMC

EIR

MSC MSC

XC IWF EC EC IWF XC
MS

CO-LOCATED
ENTITIES
BSC

BTS BSC BTS

BTS BTS BTS

BTS
PSTN

BTS BTS

BTS
MS
BTS

MS

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 4-7

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev X.25 Interfaces

X.25 Interfaces
The diagram opposite shows the X.25 packet data connections of the system.
The X.25 packets provide the OMC with communications to all the entities over which
it has control and oversight. Remember that these X.25 connections will commonly be
contained within 2 Mbit/s links using a dedicated timeslot.
Note that the X.25 connection from the OMC to the BSS may be "nailed through" (or permanently
connected by software) at the MSC, or may be supported by a completely independent physical route.

FRAME CHECK
FLAG SEQUENCE INFORMATION CONTROL ADDRESS FLAG

last bit (LAPB FRAME) first bit

4-8 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
X.25 Interfaces Version Rev

X.25 Interfaces

NMC

VLR VLR
HLR

BSS XC AUC
OMC

EIR

MSC MSC

XC IWF EC EC IWF XC
MS

BSC

BTS BSC BTS

BTS BTS BTS

BTS
PSTN

BTS BTS

BTS
MS
BTS

MS

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 4-9

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev ITU-TS Signalling System #7

ITU-TS Signalling System #7

The diagram opposite illustrates the use of C7 in the GSM system; carrying signalling and control
information between most major entities, and to and from the PSTN.
The following message protocols, which are part of C7, are used to communicate
between the different GSM network entities:
• Interfacing the PSTN, the MSC performs call signalling functions using the Telephone User
Part (TUP), or interfacing the ISDN, the ISDN User Part (ISUP).
• Between the MSC and the BSC, the Base Station System Management Application Part (BSSMAP)
is used. The Direct Transfer Application Part (DTAP) is used to send messages between the MSC
and the mobile (MS). MAP is used between the MSC and the VLR, EIR, and HLR.

Acronyms:

Parameter Valid Input

BSSAP Base Station System Application Part
BSSMAP Base Station System Management Application
Part
DTAP Direct Transfer Application Part
ISUP ISDN User ParT
MAP Mobile Application Part
SCCP Signalling Connection Control Part
TUP Telephone User Part
TCAP Transaction Capabilities Application Part

SS#7
OSI Layers Levels
Application 7
MAP BSSAP
Presentation 6 (DTAP +
TUP ISUP
TCAP BSSMAP) 4
Session 5

Transport 4
SCCP
Network 3
MTP Level 3 3
Link 2 MTP Level 2 2
MTP Level 1
Physical 1
2 Mbit/s Trunk 1

4-10 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
ITU-TS Signalling System #7 Version Rev

C7 Interfaces

NM
C

VLR VLR
HLR

BSS XC AUC
OMC

EIR

MSC MSC MAP

BSSAP
XC IWF EC EC IWF XC
MS

TUP BSC
BSSMAP

BTS BSC BTS

BTS BTS BTS

BTS
PSTN

BTS BTS

DTAP
BTS
MS
BTS

MS

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 4-11

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev A-bis (LAPD) Interfaces

A-bis (LAPD) Interfaces

Because of the specific nature of the signalling and control information passing over the 2 Mbit/s
links between the BSC and remotely sited BTS, a different type of interface is required. GSM has
specified the use of LAPD. This protocol uses the standard frame structure shown below.
The GSM specifications for this interface (termed "A-bis") are not very specific and therefore
interpretations of the interface vary. This means that one manufacturers BTS will not work with
another manufacturer’s BSC. As we have already mentioned, the functionality split between the
BTS and BSC is also largely in the hands of the manufacturer and therefore it is unlikely that they
would operate together, even if this interface were rigidly enforced by the specifications.

FRAME CHECK
FLAG SEQUENCE INFORMATION CONTROL ADDRESS FLAG

last bit (LAPD FRAME) first bit

4-12 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
A-bis (LAPD) Interfaces Version Rev

A-bis (LAPD) Interfaces

NMC

VLR VLR HLR

BSS
XC AUC
OMC

EIR

MSC
MSC

XC IWF EC EC IWF XC
MS

BSC

BTS BSC BTS

BTS BTS BTS

BTS
PSTN
LAPD

BTS BTS

BTS
MS
BTS

MS LAPDm
(Air interface)

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 4-13

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Interconnections

Interconnections
The interface between the BSC and the MSC is a standardized ITU-TSS signalling
system No7 (C7) interface, referred to as the A interface.
The interface supports the following connections:
• BSC-MSC, BSC-BTS and MSC-MS.
• Operation and Maintenance interface.
• All call processing functions.
These interfaces are commonly transported on a physical bearer, the 2 Mbit/s link.
Each of these 2 Mbit/s links provide 32 x 64 kbit/s channels (timeslots), the first channel (TS0) is used
for frame alignment, leaving 31 channels available for carry "traffic channels" or "signalling interfaces".
The signalling protocols used between GSM networks are:
• X.25 (LAPB), 1 x 64 kbit/s timeslot.
• C7 (SS7), 1 x 64 kbit/s timeslot (BSSAP, MAP, TCAP, SCCP, MTP).
• LAPD, 1 x 64 kbit/s timeslot.
The X.25 protocol is used between the BSC-OMC.
The C7 link is between the BSC-MSC, dependent on what type of signalling is required
will depend on which part of the C7 protocol will be used (for example, MSC-MS will use
a subset of BSSAP called DTAP to transfer messages).
The LAPD protocol is used between the BSC-BTS, this is normally 64 kbit/s as stated
but some manufactures offer 16 kbit/s links as well.
The link between the BSC-CBC does not use a specified protocol. The choice of protocol is decided
between the PLMN provider and the CBC provider. (Typically X.25 or C7 may be used).

4-14 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Interconnections Version Rev

BSC Connections

MSC

OMC
MTL RXCDR
R
(C7)
OML
XBL (X.25)

CBC

BSC CBL

RSL RSL RSL

(LAPD) (LAPD) (LAPD)

BTS BTS BTS

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 4-15

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Interface Names

Interface Names
Each interface specified within the GSM system has a name associated with it. The diagram
opposite illustrates the names of all the interfaces specified by GSM.

Name Interface

Um MS BTS

A-bis BTS BSC

A BSC MSC

B MSC VLR

C MSC HLR

D VLR HLR

E MSC MSC

F MSC EIR

G VLR VLR

H HLR AUC

4-16 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Interface Names Version Rev

The GSM System Interface Names

NMC

G D
VLR VLR
HLR
B H
BSS XC AUC
OMC B
C
EIR

MSC
E
MSC F

XC IWF EC EC IWF XC
MS

A BSC
Abis
BTS BSC BTS

BTS BTS BTS

BTS
PSTN

BTS BTS
Um
BTS

MS
BTS

MS

CO-LOCATED ENTITIES

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 4-17

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Interface Names

This page intentionally left blank.

4-18 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Channels on the Air Interface Version Rev

Chapter 5

Channels on the Air Interface

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-1

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Channels on the Air Interface

This page intentionally left blank.

5-2 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Channels on the Air Interface Version Rev

Channels on the Air Interface

Section Objectives
On completion of this section the student will be able to:
• State why GMSK is used to modulate the GSM signal.
• Name the four most commonly used channel combinations and provide
reasons why each would be used.
• State the reason why multiframes, superframes and hyperframes are utilized.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-3

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Transmission of Analogue and Digital Signals

Transmission of Analogue and Digital Signals

The main reasons why GSM uses a digital air interface:
• It is ‘‘noise robust", enabling the use of tighter frequency re-use patterns
and minimizing interference problems;
• It incorporates error correction, thus protecting the traffic that it carries;
• It offers greatly enhanced privacy to subscribers and security to network providers;
• It is ISDN compatible, uses open standardized interfaces and offers an enhanced
range of services to its subscribers.

Modulation Techniques
There are three methods of modulating a signal so that it may be transmitted over the air:
• Amplitude Modulation (AM)
Amplitude Modulation is very simple to implement for analogue signals but it is prone to noise.
• Frequency Modulation (FM)
Frequency Modulation is more complicated to implement but provides a better tolerance to noise.
• Phase Modulation (PM)
Phase Modulation provides the best tolerance to noise but it is very complex to
implement for analogue signals and therefore is rarely used.
Digital signals can use any of the modulation methods, but phase modulation provides
the best noise tolerance. Since phase modulation can be implemented easily for digital
signals, this is the method which is used for the GSM air interface. Phase Modulation is
known as Phase Shift Keying (PSK) when applied to digital signals.

5-4 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Transmission of Analogue and Digital Signals Version Rev

Modulation Techniques

1. Amplitude Modulation (AM)

2. Frequency Modulation (FM)

3. Phase Shift Keying (PSK)

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-5

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Transmission of Digital Signals

Transmission of Digital Signals

Phase Shift Keying (PSK)
Phase modulation provides a high degree of noise tolerance. However, there is a problem with
this form of modulation. When the signal changes phase abruptly, high frequency components
are produced, thus a wide bandwidth would be required for transmission.
GSM has to be as efficient as possible with the available bandwidth. Therefore, it is not this
technique, but a more efficient development of phase modulation that is actually used by the
GSM air interface, it is called Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK).

Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK)

With GMSK, the phase change which represents the change from a digital ‘1’ or a ‘0’ does not occur
instantaneously as it does with Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK). Instead it occurs over a period of
time and therefore the addition of high frequency components to the spectrum is reduced.
With GMSK, first the digital signal is filtered through a Gaussian filter. This filter causes distortion to
the signal, the corners are rounded off. This distorted signal is then used to phase shift the carrier
signal. The phase change therefore is no longer instantaneous but spread out.

5-6 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Transmission of Digital Signals Version Rev

Frequency Spectrum

Power

Frequency

Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK)

1 0 0 1 1

GAUSSIAN
DIGITAL FILTER PHASE
MODULATOR

TRANSMITTED SIGNAL

1 0 0 1 1

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-7

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Physical and Logical Channels

Physical and Logical Channels

The physical channel is the medium over which the information is carried, in the case
of a terrestrial interface this would be a cable. The logical channels consist of the
information carried over the physical channel.

GSM Physical Channels

A single GSM RF carrier can support up to eight MS subscribers simultaneously. The diagram
opposite shows how this is accomplished. Each channel occupies the carrier for one eighth of
the time. This is a technique called Time Division Multiple Access.
Time is divided into discrete periods called "timeslots". The timeslots are arranged in sequence and are
conventionally numbered 0 to 7. Each repetition of this sequence is called a "TDMA frame".
Each MS telephone call occupies one timeslot (0-7) within the frame until the call is terminated,
or a handover occurs. The TDMA frames are then built into further frame structures according
to the type of channel. We shall later examine how the information carried by the air interface
builds into frames and multi-frames and discuss the associated timing.
For such a system to work correctly, the timing of the transmissions to and from the mobiles is critical.
The MS or Base Station must transmit the information related to one call at exactly the right moment, or
the timeslot will be missed. The information carried in one timeslot is called a "burst".
Each data burst, occupying its allocated timeslot within successive TDMA frames, provides a single
GSM physical channel carrying a varying number of logical channels between the MS and BTS.

5-8 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Physical and Logical Channels Version Rev

Timeslots and TDMA Frames

TDMA FRAME 1 TDMA FRAME 2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Timeslot

BURST

TIMESLOT

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-9

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Logical Channels

GSM Logical Channels

There are two main groups of logical channels, traffic channels and control channels.

Traffic Channels (TCH)

The traffic channel carries speech or data information. The different types of
traffic channel are listed below:
Full rate
• TCH/FS: Speech (13 kbit/s net, 22.8 kbit/s gross)
• TCH/EFR: Speech (12.2 kbit/s net, 22.8 kbit/s gross)
• TCH/F9.6: 9.6 kbit/s - data
• TCH/F4.8: 4.8 kbit/s - data
• TCH/F2.4: 2.4 kbit/s - data
Half rate
• TCH/HS: speech (6.5 kbit/s net, 11.4 kbit/s gross)
• TCH/H4.8: 4.8 kbit/s - data
• TCH/H2.4: 2.4 kbit/s - data

Acronyms:

TCH Traffic Channel

TCH/FS Full rate speech channel
TCH/EFR Enhanced full rate speech
TCH/HS Half rate speech channel
TCH/9.6 Data channel 9.6 kbit/s
TCH/4.8 Data channel 4.8 kbit/s
TCH/2.4 Data channel 2.4 kbit/s

Speech Channels
Speech channels are supported by two different methods of coding known as Full Rate (FR)
and Enhanced Full Rate (EFR). Enhanced Full Rate coding provides a speech service that
has improved voice quality from the original Full Rate speech coding, whilst using the same
air interface bandwidth. EFR employs a new speech coding algorithm and additions to the
full rate channel coding algorithm to accomplish this improved speech service, however,
it will only be supported by Phase 2+ mobiles onwards.

5-10 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Logical Channels Version Rev

Channels on the Air Interface

TCH
Traffic Channels

NB
NB

Data
Speech

TCH/9.6 TCH/2.4

TCH/FS TCH/HS

TCH/4.8

TCH/EFR

TCH

SACCH FACCH

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-11

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Control Channel Groups

GSM Control Channel Groups

These are: Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH); Common Control Channel (CCCH);
Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH).

BCCH Group
The Broadcast Control Channels are downlink only (BSS to MS) and comprise the following:
• BCCH carries information about the network, a MSs present cell and the surrounding cells. It is
transmitted continuously as its signal strength is measured by all MSs on surrounding cells.
• The Synchronizing Channel (SCH) carries information for frame synchronization.
• The Frequency Control Channel (FCCH) provides information for carrier synchronization.

CCCH Group
The Common Control Channel Group works in both uplink and downlink directions.
• Random Access Channel (RACH) is used by MSs to gain access to the system.
• Paging Channel (PCH) and Access Granted Channel (AGCH) operate in the "downlink"
direction. The AGCH is used to assign resources to the MS, such as a Stand-alone
Dedicated Control Channel (SDCCH). The PCH is used by the system to call a MS.
The PCH and AGCH are never used at the same time.
• Cell Broadcast Channel (CBCH) is used to transmit messages to be broadcast to all MSs
within a cell, for example, road traffic information, sporting results.

DCCH Group
Dedicated Control Channels are assigned to a single MS for call setup and
subscriber validation. DCCH comprises:
• Stand-alone Dedicated Control Channel (SDCCH) which supports the transfer of Data
to and from the MS during call setup and validation.
• Associated Control Channel. This consists of Slow ACCH which is used for radio link measurement
and power control messages. Fast ACCH is used to pass "event" type messages, for example,
handover messages. Both FACCH and SACCH operate in uplink and downlink directions.

Acronyms

BCCH Broadcast Control CCCH Common Control

Channel Channel
DCCH Dedicated Control ACCH Associated Control
Channel Channel
SDCCH Stand-alone Dedicated RACH Random Access
Control Channel Channel
AGCH Access Grant Channel PCH Paging Channel
CBCH Cell Broadcast Channel

5-12 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Control Channel Groups Version Rev

Control Channels

CCH
Control Channel

NB NB/AB

BCCH
DCCH - downlink only

NB/DB

Synch.
SDCCH ACCH BCCH Channels

SB FB

FACCH SACCH SCH FCCH

CCCH

AB
NB

RACH - CBCH -
uplink downlink
NB

PCH/AGCH
- downlink

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-13

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Logical Channels

GSM Logical Channels

Control Channels

Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH)

The Broadcast Control Channel is transmitted by the BTS at all times. The RF carrier used to transmit
the BCCH is referred to as the BCCH carrier. The information carried on the BCCH is monitored
by the MS periodically (at least every 30 secs), when it is switched on and not in a call.
Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) - Carries the following information (this is only a partial list):
• Location Area Identity (LAI).
• List of neighbouring cells which should be monitored by the MS.
• List of frequencies used in the cell.
• Cell identity.
• Power control indicator.
• DTX permitted.
• Access control (for example, emergency calls, call barring).
• CBCH description.
The BCCH is transmitted at constant power at all times, and its signal strength is
measured by all MS which may seek to use it. "Dummy" bursts are transmitted to
ensure continuity when there is no BCCH carrier traffic.
• Frequency Correction Channel (FCCH)
This is transmitted frequently on the BCCH timeslot and allows the mobile to synchronize its own
frequency to that of the transmitting base site. The FCCH may only be sent during timeslot 0 on the
BCCH carrier frequency and therefore it acts as a flag to the mobile to identify Timeslot 0.
• Synchronization Channel (SCH)
The SCH carries the information to enable the MS to synchronize to the TDMA frame structure
and know the timing of the individual timeslots. The following parameters are sent:
- Frame number.
- Base Site Identity Code (BSIC).
The MS will monitor BCCH information from surrounding cells and store the information
from the best six cells. The SCH information on these cells is also stored so that the
MS may quickly resynchronize when it enters a new cell.

5-14 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Logical Channels Version Rev

Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH)

CCH
Control Channel

BCCH
Broadcast Control Channel
- - downlink only

Synchronizing
BCCH Channels

SCH FCCH

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-15

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Logical Channels

Control Channels

Common Control Channels (CCCH)

The Common Control Channel (CCCH) is responsible for transferring control information
between all mobiles and the BTS. This is necessary for the implementation of
"call origination" and "call paging" functions.
It consists of the following:
• Random Access Channel (RACH)
Used by the mobile when it requires to gain access to the system. This occurs when
the mobile initiates a call or responds to a page.
• Paging Channel (PCH)
Used by the BTS to page MS, (paging can be performed by an IMSI, TMSI or IMEI).
• Access Grant Control Channel (AGCH)
Used by the BTS to assign a dedicated control channel to a MS in response to an
access message received on the Random Access Channel. The MS will move to the
dedicated channel in order to proceed with either a call setup, response to a paging
message, Location Area Update or Short Message Service.
• Cell Broadcast Channel (CBCH)
This channel is used to transmit messages to be broadcast to all MSs within a cell. The CBCH
uses a dedicated control channel to send its messages, however it is considered a common
channel because the messages can be received by all mobiles in the cell.
Active MSs must frequently monitor both BCCH and CCCH. The CCCH will be
transmitted on the RF carrier with the BCCH.

Acronyms:

CCH Common Control Channel

RACH Random Access Channel
PCH Paging Channel
AGCH Access Grant Channel
CBCH Cell Broadcast Channel

5-16 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Logical Channels Version Rev

Common Control Channel (CCCH)

CCH
Control Channel

CCCH
Common Control Channel
- - Bidirectional

RACH CBCH
- - uplink - - downlink

PCH/AGCH
- - downlink

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-17

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Logical Channels

Control Channels

Dedicated Control Channels (DCCH)

The DCCH is a single timeslot on an RF carrier which is used to convey eight Stand-alone
Dedicated Control Channels (SDCCH). A SDCCH is used by a single MS for call setup,
authentication, location updating and SMS point to point.
As we will see later, SDCCH can also be found on a BCCH/CCCH timeslot,
this configuration only allows four SDCCHs.

Associated Control Channels (ACCH)

These channels can be associated with either an SDCCH or a TCH. They are used for carrying
information associated with the process being carried out on either the SDCCH or the TCH.
• Slow Associated Control Channel (SACCH)
Conveys power control and timing information in the downlink direction (towards the MS) and
Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI), and link quality reports in the uplink direction.
• Fast Associated Control Channel (FACCH)
The FACCH is transmitted instead of a TCH. The FACCH ‘‘steals" the TCH burst and
inserts its own information. The FACCH is used to carry out user authentication,
handovers and immediate assignment.
All of the control channels are required for system operation, however, in the same way
that we allow different users to share the radio channel by using different timeslots to carry
the conversation data, the control channels share timeslots on the radio channel at different
times. This allows efficient passing of control information without wasting capacity which
could be used for call traffic. To do this we must organise the timeslots between those which
will be used for traffic and those which will carry control signalling.

Acronyms:

SDCCH Stand-alone Dedicated Control Channel

SACCH Slow Associated Control Channel
FACCH Fast Associated Control Channel

5-18 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Logical Channels Version Rev

Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH)

CCH
Control Channel

DCCH
- - Bidirectional

SDCCH ACCH

FACCH SACCH

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-19

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Logical Channels

Channel Combinations
The different logical channel types mentioned are grouped into what are called channel
combinations. The four most common channel combinations are listed below:
• Full Rate Traffic Channel Combination - TCH8/FACCH + SACCH
• Broadcast Channel Combination - BCCH + CCCH
• Dedicated Channel Combination - SDCCH8 + SACCH8
• Combined Channel Combination - BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH4+SACCH4
The Half Rate Channel Combination (when introduced) will be very similar to
the Full Rate Traffic Combination.
• Half Rate Traffic Channel Combination - TCH16/FACCH + SACCH

Channel Combinations and Timeslots

The channel combinations we have identified are sent over the air interface in a selected timeslot.
Some channel combinations may be sent on any timeslot, but others must be sent on specific
timeslots. Below is a table mapping the channels combinations to their respective timeslots:

Channel Combination Timeslots

Traffic Any timeslot
Broadcast 0,2,4,6 (0 must be used first) *
Dedicated Any timeslot
Combined 0 only

The diagram opposite illustrates how these different channel combinations may
be mapped onto the TDMA frame structure.
* If broadcast is assigned to timeslots 2, 4 or 6 then FCCH and SCH will be replaced with
dummy bursts since these control channels may only occur on timeslot 0.
Note:
Only one BCCH/CCCH timeslot is required per cell (not RF carrier).

5-20 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Logical Channels Version Rev

Timeslots and TDMA Frames

LOW CAPACITY CELL

TRAFFIC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

COMBINED
BCCH/CCCH/DCCH

HIGHER CAPACITY CELL

BCCH/CCCH

TRAFFIC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

DCCH

TRAFFIC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-21

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Multiframes and Timing

Multiframes and Timing

There are eight timeslots within each TDMA frame, enabling eight physical channels
to share a single physical resource - the RF carrier. In turn, each physical channel
may be shared by a number of logical channels.
In order to understand how a single physical channel is shared by various logical channels, it is
necessary to introduce the GSM multiframe structures that make it possible.

The 26-frame Traffic Channel Multiframe

The illustration opposite shows the time relationship between time-slot, TDMA frame, and
the 26-frame multiframe. Some of the times shown are approximate numbers as the GSM
recommendations actually state the exact values as fractions rather than in decimal form
(for example, the exact duration of a time-slot is 15/26 ms).
Note:
The 12th frame (no. 13) in the 26-frame traffic channel multiframe is used by the Slow
Associated Control Channel (SACCH) which carries link control information to and from the
MS-BTS. Each timeslot in a cell allocated to traffic channel usage will follow this format, that
is, 12 bursts of traffic, 1 burst of SACCH, 12 bursts of traffic and 1 idle.
The duration of a 26-frame traffic channel multiframe is 120 ms (26 TDMA frames).
When half rate is used, each frame of the 26-frame traffic channel multiframe allocated for traffic will
now carry two MS subscriber calls (the data rate for each MS is halved over the air interface). Although
the data rate for traffic is halved, each MS still requires the same amount of SACCH information to be
transmitted, therefore frame 12 WILL BE USED as SACCH for one half of the MSs and the others
will use it as their IDLE frame, and the same applies for frame 25, this will be used by the MSs for
SACCH (those who used frame 12 as IDLE) and the other half will use it as their IDLE frame.

5-22 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Multiframes and Timing Version Rev

26-Frame Traffic Channel Multiframe

0.577 ms

Timeslot

TDMA frame
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

4.615 ms

2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Idle SACCH

Multiframe

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

120 ms

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-23

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Multiframes and Timing

The 51-frame Control Channel Multiframe

The 51-frame structure used for control channels is considerably more complex than the 26-frame
structure used for the traffic channels. The 51-frame structure occurs in several forms, depending
on the type of control channel and the network provider’s requirements.

5-24 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Multiframes and Timing Version Rev

51-Frame Control Channel Multiframes

0.577 ms

Timeslot

TDMA frame
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

4.615 ms

2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Multiframe

50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Time

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-25

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Multiframes and Timing

The 51-frame Control Channel Multiframe (BCCH/CCCH)

The BCCH/CCCH 51-frame structure illustrated on the opposite page will apply to timeslot 0 of
each TDMA frame on the ‘BCCH carrier’ (the RF carrier frequency to which BCCH is assigned
on a per cell basis). In the diagram, each vertical step represents one repetition of the timeslot
(= one TDMA frame), with the first repetition (numbered 0) at the bottom.
Looking at the uplink (MS-BSS) direction, all timeslot 0s are allocated to RACH. This is fairly obvious
because RACH is the only control channel in the BCCH/CCCH group which works in the uplink direction.
In the downlink direction (BSS-MS), the arrangement is more interesting. Starting at frame 0 of the
51-frame structure, the first timeslot 0 is occupied by a frequency burst (‘F’ in the diagram), the second
by a synchronizing burst (‘S’) and then the following four repetitions of timeslot 0 by BCCH data (B) in
frames 2-5. The following four repetitions of timeslot 0 in frames 6-9 are allocated to CCCH traffic (C),
that is, to either PCH (mobile paging channel) or AGCH (access grant channel). Then follows, in timeslot
0 of frames 10 and 11, a repeat of the frequency and synchronising bursts (F and S), four further CCCH
bursts (C) and so on. Note that the last timeslot 0 in the sequence (the fifty-first frame - frame 50) is idle.

5-26 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Multiframes and Timing Version Rev

BCCH/CCCH Multiframe

50 I 50 R
R
R
C R
R
R
R
C R
R
S R
40 F 40 R
R
R
C R
R
R
R
C R
R
S R
30 F 30 R
R
R
C R
R
R
R
C R
R
S R
20 F 20 R
R
R
C R
R
R
R
C R
R
S R
10 F 10 R
R
R
C R
R
R
R
B R
R
Downlink S
Uplink R
0 F 0 R

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-27

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Multiframes and Timing

The 51-frame Control Channel Multiframe - DCCH/8 (SDCCH and SACCH)

The diagram opposite shows the 51-frame structure used to accommodate eight SDCCHs, although,
as it takes two repetitions of the multiframe to complete the entire sequence, it may be more logical to
think of it as a 102-frame structure. This structure may be transmitted on any timeslot.
Note that the SACCHs (shaded) are associated with the SDCCHs. It is important to remember
that each SDCCH has an SACCH just like a traffic channel.

i.e.: D0 associated with A0

D1 associated with A1
.
.
.
.
.
D7 associated with A7

Note: The downlink and uplink channels are staggered in order to give the mobile time
to process the received message and formulate a response.

5-28 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Multiframes and Timing Version Rev

DCCH/8 Multiframe

50 I 101 I 50 101
I I
I I A0 A4

A3 A7
D7 D7

A2 A6
40 40 D6 D6

A1 A5
D5 D5

A0 A4
D4 D4

30 30
D7 D7
D3 D3

D6 D6
D2 D2

D5 D5
20 20 D1 D1

D4 D4
D0 D0

D3 D3 I I
I I
I I
10 10
D2 D2 A7 A3

D1 D1 A6 A2

Downlink D0 D0 Uplink A5 A1
0 51 0 51

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-29

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Multiframes and Timing

The 51-frame Control Channel Multiframe - Combined Structure

As we can see in the diagram opposite, each of the control channel types are present on a single
timeslot. The number of MSs which can effectively use this cell is therefore reduced, as we now only
have 3 CCCH groups and 4 SDCCHs, which translates into fewer pages and simultaneous cell setups.
A typical use of this type of control channel timeslot is in rural areas, where the subscriber density is low.

5-30 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Multiframes and Timing Version Rev

Combined Multiframe

50 I 101 I 50 101
D2 D2
A1 A3
R R
R R
A0 A2
D1 D1
S S
40 F F 40
D0 D0
D3 D3
R R
R R
R R
D2 D2 R
R
R R
S S R R
30 F F R R
R30 R
R R
D1 D1 R
R
R R
R R
R R
D0 D0 R
R
R R
S S R R
20 F F R R
R20 R
R R
C C R
R
R R
R R
R R
C C

S A3 A1
S
10 F F
10

C C A2 A0

R R
R R
B B
Downlink Uplink D3 D3
S S
0 F 51 F 0 51

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-31

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Superframes and Hyperframes

Superframes and Hyperframes

It is not by accident that the control channel multiframe is not a direct multiple of the traffic
channel multiframe. From the diagram, it can be seen that any given frame number will only occur
simultaneously in both multiframes every 1326 TDMA frames (26 x 51). This number of TDMA frames
is termed a "superframe" and it takes 6.12 s to transmit. This arrangement means that the timing of
the traffic channel multiframe is always moving in relation to that of the control channel multiframe
and this enables a MS to receive and decode BCCH information from surrounding cells.
If the two multiframes were exact multiples of each other, then control channel timeslots would be
permanently ‘masked’ by traffic channel timeslot activity. This changing relationship between the two
multiframes is particularly important, for example, to a MS which needs to be able to monitor and report
the RSSIs of neighbour cells (it needs to be able to ‘see’ all the BCCHs of those cells in order to do this).
The "hyperframe" consists of 2048 superframes, this is used in connection with ciphering
and frequency hopping. The hyperframe lasts for over three hours, after this time the
ciphering and frequency hopping algorithms are restarted.

5-32 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Superframes and Hyperframes Version Rev

Superframe and Hyperframe

1 hyperframe = 2048 superframes

= 2,715,648 TDMA frames

0 1 2 2045 2046 2047

3 h 28 min 53 s 760 ms

1 superframe = 1326 TDMA frames =

51 (26-frame) or 26 (51-frame) multiframes

0 1 2 3 47 48 49 50

23 24 25
0 1 24 25

6.12 s

120 ms 235.65 ms

0 1 2 23 24 25 0 1 2 48 49 50

26-frame multiframe 51-frame multiframe

TRAFFIC CHANNELS CONTROLCHANNELS

4.615 ms
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

TDMA frame

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-33

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Mobile Activity - Transmit and Receive Timeslots

Mobile Activity - Transmit and Receive Timeslots

Overview
As the MS only transmits or receives its own physical channel (normally containing TCH and SACCH)
for one-eighth of the time, it uses the remaining time to monitor the BCCHs of adjacent ‘target’ cells.
It completes the process every 480 ms, or four 26-TCH multiframes. The message that it sends to
the BSS (on SACCH, uplink) contains the Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) of the adjacent
cells, plus that of the link to the BSS itself, plus an indication of the quality of the current connection.
This quality measurement is somewhat similar to a bit error rate test. Just as the mobile completes
one series of measurements, it completes sending the previous series to the BSS and starts to send
the latest series; thus the processes of compilation and transmission form a continuous cycle.

5-34 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Mobile Activity - Transmit and Receive Timeslots Version Rev

Mobile Activity

BTS

BTS BTS

TCH (one(T/S)

BTS

MS

BTS
BTS

BTS

TCH

Message sent

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-35

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Basic Call Sequence

GSM Basic Call Sequence

The diagram opposite reminds us of the basic components and processes involved in setting
up a call between a GSM MS and an ordinary "land" telephone.
• In the MS to Land direction
The BTS receives a data message from the MS which it passes it to the BSC. The BSC
relays the message to the MSC via C7 signalling links, and the MSC then sets up the call to
the land subscriber via the PSTN. The MSC connects the PSTN to the GSM network, and
allocates a terrestrial circuit to the BSS serving the MS’s location. The BSC of that BSS
sets up the air interface channel to the MS and then connects that channel to the allocated
terrestrial circuit, completing the connection between the two subscribers.
• In the Land to MS direction
The MSC receives its initial data message from the PSTN (via C7) and then establishes the
location of the MS by referencing the HLR. It then knows which other MSC to contact to establish
the call and that MSC then sets up the call via the BSS serving the MS’s location.
The actual processes are, of course, considerably more complex than described above. Also, there
are many different GSM call sequence and handover scenarios - enough to form the subject of their
own training programme! In this course we consider in detail just the MS to Land and Land to MS call
sequences and the intra-MSC (inter-BSS) handover sequence. This will give you a good appreciation
of the messaging that occurs in the GSM system, and how the PLMN interacts with the PSTN.

5-36 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Basic Call Sequence Version Rev

GSM Basic Call Sequence

(RACH)

(SDCCH) BTS

(TCH)

BSC Allocate channel on

air interface

Allocate terrestrial
MSC channel & connect to
PSTN

VLR

HLR
PSTN

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 5-37

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Basic Call Sequence

This page intentionally left blank.

5-38 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Channel Coding on the Air Interface Version Rev

Chapter 6

Channel Coding on the Air Interface

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-1

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Channel Coding on the Air Interface

This page intentionally left blank.

6-2 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Channel Coding on the Air Interface Version Rev

Channel Coding on the Air Interface

Section Objectives
On completion of this section the student will be able to:
• Draw the structure of a GSM burst and identify the purpose of each component.
• State the different mechanisms used to protect the air interface from errors
on speech, data and control channels.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-3

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Bursts

GSM Bursts
The diagram opposite illustrates a GSM burst. It consists of several different
elements. These elements are described below:

Information
This is the area in which the speech, data or control information is held.

Guard Period
The BTS and MS can only receive the burst and decode it, if it is received within the timeslot
designated for it. The timing, therefore, must be extremely accurate, but the structure does
allow for a small margin of error by incorporating a ‘guard period’ as shown in the diagram. To
be precise, the timeslot is 0.577 ms long, whereas the burst is only 0.546 ms long, therefore
there is a time difference of 0.031 ms to enable the burst to hit the timeslot.

Stealing Flags
These two bits are set when a traffic channel burst has been ‘‘stolen" by a FACCH (the Fast Associated
Control Channel). One bit set indicates that half of the block has been stolen.

Training Sequence
This is used by the receiver’s equalizer as it estimates the transfer characteristic of the physical
path between the BTS and the MS. The training sequence is 26 bits long.

Tail Bits
These are used to indicate the beginning and end of the burst.

6-4 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Bursts Version Rev

GSM Burst and TDMA Frame

FRAME 1 FRAME 2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

GUARD
PERIOD NORMAL BURST GUARD
PERIOD

INFORMATION TRAINING SEQUENCE INFORMATION

STEALING
FLAGS
TAIL BITS TAIL BITS

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-5

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Bursts

Burst Types
The diagram opposite shows the five types of burst employed in the GSM air interface.
All bursts, of whatever type, have to be timed so that they are received within
the appropriate timeslot of the TDMA frame.
The burst is the sequence of bits transmitted by the BTS or MS, the timeslot is the discrete period
of real time within which it must arrive in order to be correctly decoded by the receiver:

Normal Burst
The normal burst carries traffic channels and all types of control channels apart from
those mentioned specifically below. (Bi-directional).

Frequency Correction Burst

This burst carries FCCH downlink to correct the frequency of the MS’s local oscillator,
effectively locking it to that of the BTS.

Synchronization Burst
So called because its function is to carry SCH downlink, synchronizing the timing
of the MS to that of the BTS.

Dummy Burst
Used when there is no information to be carried on the unused timeslots of
the BCCH Carrier (downlink only).

Access Burst
This burst is of much shorter duration than the other types. The increased guard period is
necessary because the timing of its transmission is unknown. When this burst is transmitted,
the BTS does not know the location of the MS and therefore the timing of the message from
the MS can not be accurately accounted for. (The Access Burst is uplink only.)

6-6 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Bursts Version Rev

GSM Burst Types

FRAME 1 FRAME 2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

NORMAL BURST (NB)

Information Training Sequence Information
TB 57 26 57 TB GP
3 1 1 3

FREQ CORRECTION BURST (FB)

Fixed Bits
TB 142 TB GP
3 3

SYNCHRONISATION BURST (SB)

Encoded Synchronisation Sequence Encoded
TB 39 64 39 TB GP
3 3

DUMMY BURST
Fixed Bits Training Sequence Fixed Bits
TB 57 26 57 TB GP

3 1 1 3

ACCESS BURST
Synchronisation Sequence Encrypted Bits GP
TB 41 36 TB 68.25
8 3

577 sec

time

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-7

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Error Protection and Detection

Error Protection and Detection

To protect the logical channels from transmission errors introduced by the radio path, many
different coding schemes are used. The diagram overleaf illustrates the coding process for
speech, control and data channels; the sequence is very complex.
The coding and interleaving schemes depend on the type of logical channel to be encoded.
All logical channels require some form of convolutional encoding, but since protection
needs are different, the code rates may also differ.
Three coding protection schemes:
• Speech Channel Encoding
The speech information for one 20 ms speech block is divided over eight GSM
bursts. This ensures that if bursts are lost due to interference over the air interface
the speech can still be accurately reproduced.
• Common Control Channel Encoding
20 ms of information over the air will carry four bursts of control information, for example
BCCH. This enables the bursts to be inserted into one TDMA multiframe.
• Data Channel Encoding
The data information is spread over 22 bursts. This is because every bit of data information
is very important. Therefore, when the data is reconstructed at the receiver, if a burst is
lost, only a very small proportion of the 20 ms block of data will be lost. The error encoding
mechanisms should then enable the missing data to be reconstructed.

20 ms 0.577 ms
Information Information
Block Bursts

Speech (260 bits) Speech (8 bursts)

Control (184 bits) Encoding Interleaving Control (4 bursts)

Data (240 bits) Data (22 bursts)

6-8 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Error Protection and Detection Version Rev

Error Protection and Detection

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-9

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Error Protection and Detection

Speech Channel Encoding

The BTS receives transcoded speech over the A-bis interface from the BSC. At this point the
speech is organized into its individual logical channels by the BTS. These logical channels of
information are then channel coded before being transmitted over the air interface.
The transcoded speech information is received in frames, each containing 260 bits.
The speech bits are grouped into three classes of sensitivity to errors, depending on
their importance to the intelligibility of speech.
• Class 1a
Three parity bits are derived from the 50 class 1a bits. Transmission errors within these bits are
catastrophic to speech intelligibility, therefore, the speech decoder is able to detect uncorrectable
errors within the class 1a bits. If there are class 1a bit errors, the whole block is usually ignored.
• Class 1b
The 132 class 1b bits are not parity checked, but are fed together with the class 1a and
parity bits to a convolutional encoder. Four tail bits are added which set the registers
in the receiver to a known state for decoding purposes.
• Class 2
The 78 least sensitive bits are not protected at all.
The resulting 456 bit block is then interleaved before being sent over the air interface.
Note:
Over the A-bis link, when using Full Rate Speech vocoding, 260 bits are transmitted in 20 ms equalling
a transmission rate of 13 kbit/s. If Enhanced Full Rate is used then 244 bits are transmitted over the
A-bis link for each 20 ms sample. The EFR Frame is treated to some preliminary coding to build it
up to 260 bits before being applied to the same channel coding as Full Rate.
The encoded speech now occupies 456 bits but is still transmitted in 20 ms thus
raising the transmission rate to 22.8 kbit/s.

6-10 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Error Protection and Detection Version Rev

Speech Channel Coding

260 bits
Class Class Class
1a 1b 2
50 bits 132 bits 78 bits
Tail
Parity
Bits
Check
50 3 132 4

Convolutional Code

378 78

456 bits

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-11

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Channel Coding for Enhanced Full Rate

Channel Coding for Enhanced Full Rate

Overview
The transcoding for Enhanced Full Rate produces 20 ms speech frames of 244 bits for channel coding
on the air interface. After passing through a preliminary stage which adds 16 bits to make the frame up
to 260 bits the EFR speech frame is treated to the same channel coding as Full Rate.
The additional 16 bits correspond to an 8 bit CRC which is generated from the 50 class
1a bits plus the 15 most important class 1b bits and 8 repetition bits corresponding to
4 selected bits in the original EFR frame of 244 bits.

Preliminary Channel Coding for EFR

EFR Speech Frame
50 Class 1a + 124 Class 1b + 70 Class 2 = 244 bits
Preliminary Coding
8 bit CRC generated from 50 Class 1a + 15 Class 1b added to Class 1b bits
8 repetition bits added to Class 2 bits
Output from Preliminary Coding
50 Class 1a + 132 Class 1b + 78 Class 2 = 260 bits
EFR frame of 260 bits passed on for similar channel coding as Full Rate.

6-12 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Channel Coding for Enhanced Full Rate Version Rev

Preliminary Coding for Enhanced Full Rate Speech

244 bits

Class 1a Class 1b Class 2

50 bits 124 bits 70 bits

8 repetition
8 bit CRC bits added
added to Class 1b to Class 2
bits

Class 1a Class 1b Class 2

50 bits 132 bits 78 bits

260 bits

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-13

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Error Protection and Detection

Error Protection and Detection

Control Channel Encoding
The diagram opposite shows the principle of the error protection for the control channels. This scheme
is used for all the logical signalling channels, the synchronization channel (SCH) and the random
access burst (RACH). The diagram applies to SCH and RACH, but with different numbers.
When control information is received by the BTS it is received as a block of 184 bits. These bits are first
protected with a cyclic block code of a class known as a Fire Code,. This is particularly suitable for the
detection and correction of burst errors, as it uses 40 parity bits. Before the convolutional encoding,
four tail bits are added which set the registers in the receiver to a known state for decoding purposes.
The output from the encoding process for each block of 184 bits of signalling data
is 456 bits, exactly the same as for speech. The resulting 456 bit block is then
interleaved before being sent over the air interface.

6-14 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Error Protection and Detection Version Rev

Control Channel Encoding

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-15

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Error Protection and Detection

Data Channel Encoding

The diagram opposite shows the principle of the error protection for the 9.6 kbit/s data
channel. The other data channels at rates of 4.8 kbit/s and 2.4 kbit/s are encoded
slightly differently, but the principle is the same.
Data channels are encoded using a convolutional code only. With the 9.6 kbit/s data some
coded bits need to be removed (punctuated) before interleaving, so that like the speech
and control channels they contain 456 bits every 20 ms.
The data traffic channels require a higher net rate (‘net rate’ means the bit rate before coding bits have
been added) than their actual transmission rate. For example, the 9.6 kbit/s service will require 12 kbit/s,
because status signals (such as the RS-232 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) have to be transmitted as well.
The output from the encoding process for each block of 240 bits of data traffic is 456
bits, exactly the same as for speech and control. The resulting 456 bit block is then
interleaved before being sent over the air interface.
Note:
Over the PCM link 240 bits were transmitted in 20 ms equalling a transmission rate of 12
kbit/s. 9.6 kbit/s raw data and 2.4 kbit/s signalling information.
The encoded control information now occupies 456 bits but is still transmitted in 20
ms thus raising the transmission rate to 22.8 kbit/s.

6-16 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Error Protection and Detection Version Rev

Data Channel Encoding

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-17

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Mapping Logical Channels onto the TDMA Frame Structure

Mapping Logical Channels onto the TDMA Frame Structure

Interleaving
Having encoded, or error protected the logical channel, the next step is to build its bitstream
into bursts that can then be transmitted within the TDMA frame structure. It is at this stage that
the process of interleaving is carried out. Interleaving spreads the content of one traffic block
across several TDMA timeslots. The following interleaving depths are used:
• Speech - 8 blocks
• Control - 4 blocks
• Data - 22 blocks
This process is an important one, for it safeguards the data in the harsh air interface radio environment.
Because of interference, noise, or physical interruption of the radio path, bursts may be destroyed
or corrupted as they travel between MS and BTS, a figure of 10-20% is quite normal. The purpose
of interleaving is to ensure that only some of the data from each traffic block is contained within
each burst. By this means, when a burst is not correctly received, the loss does not affect
overall transmission quality because the error correction techniques are able to interpolate
for the missing data. If the system worked by simply having one traffic block per burst, then
it would be unable to do this and transmission quality would suffer.
It is interleaving that is largely responsible for the robustness of the GSM air
interface, enabling it to withstand significant noise and interference and maintain the
quality of service presented to the subscriber.

6-18 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Mapping Logical Channels onto the TDMA Frame Structure Version Rev

Interleaving

Number of
TRAU Frame GSM Bursts
Type Spread Over

Speech 8

Control 4

Data 22

Note:

TRAU = Transcoder Rate Adaption Unit

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-19

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Mapping Logical Channels onto the TDMA Frame Structure

Diagonal Interleaving - Speech

The diagram opposite illustrates, in a simplified form, the principle of the interleaving
process applied to a full-rate speech channel.
The diagram shows a sequence of ‘speech blocks’ after the encoding process previously
described, all from the same subscriber conversation. Each block contains 456 bits, these
blocks are then divided into eight blocks each containing 57 bits. Each block will only
contain bits from even bit positions or bits from odd bit positions.
The GSM burst will now be produced using these blocks of speech bits.
The first four blocks will be placed in the even bit positions of the first four bursts. The last
four blocks will be placed in the odd bit positions of the next four bursts.
As each burst contains 114 traffic carrying bits, it is in fact shared by two speech blocks. Each block will
share four bursts with the block preceding it, and four with the block that succeeds it, as shown. In the
diagram block 5 shares the first four bursts with block 4 and the second four bursts with block 6.

6-20 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Mapping Logical Channels onto the TDMA Frame Structure Version Rev

Diagonal interleaving - Speech

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-21

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Mapping Logical Channels onto the TDMA Frame Structure

Transmission - Speech
Each burst will be transmitted in the designated timeslot of eight consecutive TDMA
frames, providing the interleaving depth of eight.
The diagram opposite shows how successive bursts from this particular subscriber
conversation are transmitted. The subscriber is allocated timeslot 4 of the TDMA frame;
it will share this frame with up to seven other subscribers.
It is important to remember that each timeslot on this carrier may be occupied by a different
channel combination: traffic, broadcast, dedicated or combined.
Note that FACCH, because it ‘steals’ speech bursts from a subscriber channel, experiences
the same kind of interleaving as the speech data that it replaces (interleaving depth = 8). The
FACCH will steal a 456 bit block and be interleaved with the speech. Each burst containing
a FACCH block of information will have the appropriate stealing flag set.

6-22 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Mapping Logical Channels onto the TDMA Frame Structure Version Rev

Diagonal Interleaving - Speech

Full rate encoded speech blocks from 1 conversation arrive from the speech codec.

Speech Blocks
1 2 3 4 5 6
456
bits

4 5 6

Bursts

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

FRAME 1 FRAME 2 FRAME 3

TDMA frames

Bursts 1- -3 are shown being combined with bursts

from up to 7 other logical channels to form TDMA
frames on a single RF carrier. This conversation
occupies timeslot 4.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-23

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Mapping Logical Channels onto the TDMA Frame Structure

Rectangular Interleaving - Control

The diagram opposite illustrates, in a simplified form, the principle of rectangular
interleaving. This is applied to most control channels.
The diagram shows a sequence of ‘control blocks’ after the encoding process previously described.
Each block contains 456 bits, these blocks are then divided into four blocks each containing
114 bits. Each block will only contain bits for even or odd bit positions.
The GSM burst will be produced using these blocks of control.

Transmission - Control
Each burst will be transmitted in the designated timeslot of four consecutive TDMA
frames, providing the interleaving depth of four.
The control information is not diagonally interleaved as are speech and data. This is because
only a limited amount of control information is sent every multiframe. If the control information
was diagonally interleaved, the receiver would not be capable of decoding a control message
until at least two multiframes were received. This would be too long a delay.

6-24 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Mapping Logical Channels onto the TDMA Frame Structure Version Rev

Rectangular Interleaving - Control

Control Blocks
1 2 3 4 5 6
456
bits

4 5 6

114
114 114 114
bits
bits bits bits

even odd
odd even

Bursts

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

FRAME 1 FRAME 2 FRAME 3

TDMA frames

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-25

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Mapping Logical Channels onto the TDMA Frame Structure

Diagonal Interleaving - Data

The diagram opposite illustrates, in a simplified form, diagonal interleaving
applied to a 9.6 kbit/s data channel.
The diagram shows a sequence of ‘data blocks’ after the encoding process previously described,
all from the same subscriber. Each block contains 456 bits, these blocks are divided into four
blocks each containing 114 bits. These blocks are then interleaved together.
The first 6 bits from the first block are placed in the first burst. The first 6 bits from the second
block will be placed in the second burst and so on. Each 114 bit block is spread across 19
bursts and the total 456 block will be spread across 22 bursts.
Data channels are said to have an interleaving depth of 22, although this is sometimes
also referred to as an interleaving depth of 19.

Transmission - Data
The data bits are spread over a large number of bursts to ensure that the data is protected. Therefore,
if a burst is lost, only a very small amount of data from one data block will actually be lost. Due to
the error protection mechanisms used, the lost data can be reproduced at the receiver.
This wide interleaving depth, although providing a high resilience to error, does introduce a time
delay in the transmission of the data. If data transmission is slightly delayed, it will not effect
the reception quality, whereas with speech, if a delay were introduced this could be detected
by the subscriber. This is why speech uses a shorter interleaving depth.

6-26 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Mapping Logical Channels onto the TDMA Frame Structure Version Rev

Diagonal Interleaving - Data

Data Blocks
1 2 3 4 5 6

456
bits

114
114 114 114
bits
bits bits bits

114 114 114 114

last
first last 6
first first first last last
6 6 bits
6 6 6 6 6
bits bits
bits bits bits bits bits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 6-27

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Mapping Logical Channels onto the TDMA Frame Structure

This page intentionally left blank.

6-28 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Radio Interface Optimization Version Rev

Chapter 7

Radio Interface Optimization

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 7-1

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Radio Interface Optimization

This page intentionally left blank.

7-2 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Radio Interface Optimization Version Rev

Radio Interface Optimization

Section Objectives
On completion of this section the student will be able to:
• State the methods used to overcome the problems of transmission timing,
multipath fading and battery life within GSM.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 7-3

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Transmission Timing

Transmission Timing
To simplify the design of the MS, the GSM specifications specify an offset of three timeslots
between the BSS and MS timing, thus avoiding the necessity for the MS to transmit and
receive simultaneously. The diagram opposite illustrates this.
The synchronization of a TDMA system is critical because bursts have to be transmitted and
received within the "real time" timeslots allotted to them. The further the MS is from the base
station then, obviously, the longer it will take for the bursts to travel the distance between them.
The GSM BTS caters for this problem by instructing the MS to advance its timing ((that is,
transmit earlier) to compensate for the increased propagation delay.
This advance is then superimposed upon the three timeslot nominal offset.
The timing advance information is sent to the MS twice every second using the SACCH.
The maximum timing advance is approximately 233 µs. This caters for a maximum
cell radius of approximately 35 km.

7-4 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Transmission Timing Version Rev

Timing Advance

FRAME 1
Downlink

6 7
3 4 5 BS - - MS
1 2
0

3 TS offset

TIMING
ADVANCE FRAME 1

6 7
4 5
2 3
Uplink 0 1

MS - - BS

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 7-5

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Battery Life

Battery Life
Introduction
One of the main factors which restrict reducing the size of a MS is the battery.
A battery must be large enough to maintain a telephone call for an acceptable amount of
time without needing to be recharged. Since there is demand for MSs to become smaller
and lighter the battery must also become smaller and lighter.
Four features which enable the life of a GSM MS battery to be extended.
• Power Control
• Voice Activity Detection (VAD)
• Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)
• Discontinuous Reception (DRX)

Power Control
This is a feature of the GSM air interface which allows the network provider to not only compensate
for the distance from MS to BTS as regards timing, but can also cause the BTS and MS to adjust
their power output to take account of that distance also. The closer the MS is to the BTS, the less
the power it and the BTS will be required to transmit. This feature saves radio battery power at
the MS, and helps to reduce co-channel and adjacent channel interference.
Both uplink and downlink power settings can be controlled independently and
individually at the discretion of the network provider.
Initial power setting for the MS is set by the information provided on the Broadcast
Control Channel (BCCH) for a particular cell.
The BSS controls the transmit power of both the MS and the BTS. The received MS power is monitored
by the BSS and the receive BTS power is monitored by the MS and then reported to the BSS. Using
these measurements the power of both MS and BTS can be adjusted accordingly

7-6 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Battery Life Version Rev

Power Control

Rx Level
2 Watts LESS POWER

MS
A

BTS A
B POWER
1 Watt WINDOW
Rx
MS
B

MORE POWER

Note:
The BTS will adjust the Tx power of each MS to ensure that the Rx
signal at the BTS is maintained within the defined power window .

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 7-7

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Voice Activity Detection (VAD)

Voice Activity Detection (VAD)

Overview
VAD is a mechanism whereby the source transmitter equipment identifies the
presence or absence of speech.
VAD implementation is effected in speech mode by encoding the speech pattern silences at a rate
of 500 bit/s rather than the full 13 kbit/s. This results in a data transmission rate for background
noise, known as "comfort" noise, which is regenerated in the receiver.
Without "comfort" noise the total silence between the speech would be considered
to be disturbing by the listener.

Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)

DTX increases the efficiency of the system through a decrease in the possible radio transmission
interference level. It does this by ensuring that the MS does not transmit unnecessary
message data. DTX can be implemented, as necessary, on a call by call basis. The effects
will be most noticeable in communications between two MS.
DTX in its most extreme form, when implemented at the MS can also result in considerable power saving.
If the MS does not transmit during ‘silences’ there is a reduction in the overall power output requirement.
The implementation of DTX is very much at the discretion of the network provider and there are
different specifications applied for different types of channel usage.
DTX is implemented over a SACCH multiframe (480 ms). During this time, of the possible 104
frames, only the 4 SACCH frames and 8 Silence Discriptor (SID) frames are transmitted.

7-8 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Voice Activity Detection (VAD) Version Rev

VAD & DTX

WITHOUT
DTX

WITH
VAD + DTX

SID
52 59

S S S S
A A A A SACCH
C C C C MULTIFRAME
C C C C (480 ms)
H H H H

0 103

4 x SACCH
8 x Silence Descriptor (SID)

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 7-9

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Discontinuous Reception (DRX)

Discontinuous Reception (DRX)

DRX allows the MS to effectively "switch off" during times when reception is deemed unnecessary.
By monitoring the Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH), the Frequency Correction Control Channel
(FCCH) and the Synchronisation Control Channel (SCCH) the MS is aware of the Frame Number and
repetition format for Frame Synchronization. It can therefore, after initially locking on to a BCCH,
determine when the next relevant information is to be transmitted. This allows the MS to ‘go to
sleep’ and listen-in only when necessary, with the effective saving in power usage.
DRX may only be used when a MS is not in a call.
When DRX is employed, the MS using information broadcast on the BCCH determines its
"paging group". The paging group may appear once during a control channel multiframe,
or may only be scheduled to appear once over several multiframes - the rate of repetition
is determined by the network provider and it is this information which is broadcast over the
BCCH, which allows the MS to determine its paging group.

7-10 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Discontinuous Reception (DRX) Version Rev

DRX

8 C

7 C

S C= PCH/AGCH (CCCH)
F

6 C

5 C

S
F

4 C

3 C

S
F

2 C

1 C
MOBILE PAGED DURING THIS
PAGING BLOCK C1
S
ONCE EVERY 235 ms
F

0 C

S
F

OPTIONALLY: The MS may be paged once over a number of multiframes

C8 C17 C26 C8
C7 C16 C25 C7
MS paged only during
C6 C15 C24 C6
paging C1.
C5 C14 C23 C5 Once every 3 MF
C4 C13 C22 C4 (705 ms)
C3 C12 C21 C3
C2 C11 C20 C2
C1 C10 C19 C1
C0 C9 C18 C0

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 7-11

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Multipath Fading

Multipath Fading
Multipath Fading results from a signal travelling from a transmitter to a receiver by a number of routes.
This is caused by the signal being reflected from objects, or being influenced by atmospheric effects
as it passes, for example, through layers of air of varying temperatures and humidity.
Received signals will therefore arrive at different times and not be in phase with each other, they
will have experienced time dispersion. On arrival at the receiver, the signals combine either
constructively or destructively, the overall effect being to add together or to cancel each other out. If
the latter applies, there may be hardly any usable signal at all. The frequency band used for GSM
transmission means that a ‘‘good" location may be only 15 cm from a ‘‘bad" location!
When the receive antenna is moving, the exact phase of each path changes and consequently the
combined signal-strength is also continually changing. When the antenna is moving rapidly, this loss
is recovered by interleaving and channel coding. When it is slow moving or stationary however,
the receiver may be in a "null" (point of minimum signal) for several consecutive frames.
The diagram opposite shows a few routes by which a pulse of radio energy might
be propagated from a base station to a mobile.
Each has suffered varying losses in transmission (path attenuation), hence the variety of
amplitudes. A typical urban profile would cause dispersion of up to 5 microseconds, whereas,
a hilly terrain would cause dispersion of up to 20 microseconds.
GSM offers five techniques which combat multipath fading effects:
• Equalization.
• Diversity.
• Frequency hopping.
• Interleaving.
• Channel coding.
The equalizer must be able to cope with a dispersion of up to 17 microseconds.

7-12 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Multipath Fading Version Rev

Multipath Fading

BUILDINGS

MS

BTS

BUILDING

The Tx burst travels to the Rx antenna

using multiple paths

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 7-13

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Equalization

Equalization
Due to the signal dispersion caused by multipath signals the receiver cannot be sure exactly
when a burst will arrive and how distorted it will be. To help the receiver identify and synchronize
to the burst, a Training Sequence is sent at the centre of the burst. This is a set sequence
of bits which is known by both the transmitter and receiver.
When a burst of information is received, the equalizer searches for the training sequence
code. When it has been found, the equaliser measures and then mimics the distortion which
the signal has been subjected to. The equalizer then compares the received data with the
distorted possible transmitted sequences and chooses the most likely one.
There are eight different Training Sequence codes numbered 0-7. Nearby cells operating
with the same RF carrier frequency will use different Training Sequence Codes to
enable the receiver the discern the correct signal.

7-14 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Equalization Version Rev

Training Sequence Code

FRAME 1 FRAME 2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

GUARD
PERIOD NORMAL BURST GUARD
PERIOD

INFORMATION TRAINING SEQUENCE INFORMATION

STEALING FLAGS
TAIL BITS TAIL BITS

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 7-15

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Equalization

Diversity
Signals arrive at the receive antenna from multiple paths. The signals are therefore received by the
antenna at different phases, some at a peak and some at a trough. This means that some signals will
add together to form a strong signal, while others will subtract causing a weak signal.
When diversity is implemented, two antennas are situated at the receiver. These antennas are
placed several wavelengths apart to ensure minimum correlation between the two receive paths.
The two signals are then combined and the signal strength improved.

Signal Strength

Antenna 1

time

Signal Strength

Antenna 2

time

Signal Strength

"Intelligent
Choice"
time

7-16 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Equalization Version Rev

Diversity

Approx. 10 wavelengths

Combiner

RESULTANT SIGNAL

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 7-17

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Frequency Hopping

Frequency Hopping
Introduction
Frequency hopping allows the RF channel used for carrying signalling channel timeslots
or traffic channel (TCH) timeslots to change frequency every frame (or 4.615 msec). This
capability provides a high degree of immunity to interference, due to the effect of interference
averaging, as well as providing protection against signal fading.
The effective "radio channel interference averaging" assumes that radio channel interference
does not exist on every allocated channel and the RF channel carrying TCH timeslots
changes to a new allocated RF channel every frame. Therefore, the overall received data
communication experiences interference only part of the time.
All mobile subscribers are capable of frequency hopping under the control of the BSS. To implement
this feature, the BSS software must include the frequency hopping option. Cyclic or pseudo
random frequency hopping patterns are possible, by network provider selection.

7-18 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
 BTS Tx

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 45 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2
Frequency Hopping

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002
ARFCN 10 ARFCN 20 ARFCN 30 ARFCN 40 ARFCN 10 ARFCN 20

MS Tx

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 34 5 6 7 0 1 2 34 5 6 7 0 1 2 34 5 6 7 0 1 2 34 5 6 7 0 1 23 4 5 6 7 0 1 2

Cyclic frequency hopping using ARFCNs 10, 20, 30 and 40

CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev

7-19
Version Rev Frequency Hopping

This page intentionally left blank.

7-20 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Call and Handover Sequences Version Rev

Chapter 8

Call and Handover Sequences

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 8-1

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Call and Handover Sequences

This page intentionally left blank.

8-2 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Call and Handover Sequences Version Rev

Call and Handover Sequences

Section Objectives
On completion of this section the student will be able to:
• State the sequences used for call setup and handover.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 8-3

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM Basic Call Sequence

GSM Basic Call Sequence

The diagram opposite reminds us of the basic components and processes involved in setting
up a call between a GSM MS and an ordinary "land" telephone.
• In the MS to Land direction
The BTS receives a data message from the MS which it passes it to the BSC. The BSC
relays the message to the MSC via C7 signalling links, and the MSC then sets up the call to
the land subscriber via the PSTN. The MSC connects the PSTN to the GSM network, and
allocates a terrestrial circuit to the BSS serving the MS’s location. The BSC of that BSS
sets up the air interface channel to the MS and then connects that channel to the allocated
terrestrial circuit, completing the connection between the two subscribers.
• In the Land to MS direction
The MSC receives its initial data message from the PSTN (via C7) and then establishes the
location of the MS by referencing the HLR. It then knows which other MSC to contact to establish
the call and that MSC then sets up the call via the BSS serving the MS’s location.
The actual processes are, of course, considerably more complex than described above. Also, there
are many different GSM call sequence and handover scenarios - enough to form the subject of their
own training programme! In this course we consider in detail just the MS to Land and Land to MS call
sequences and the intra-MSC (inter-BSS) handover sequence. This will give you a good appreciation
of the messaging that occurs in the GSM system, and how the PLMN interacts with the PSTN.

8-4 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM Basic Call Sequence Version Rev

GSM Basic Call Sequence

(RACH)

(SDCCH) BTS

(TCH)

BSC Allocate channel on air

interface

Allocate terrestrial
MSC channel & connect to
PSTN

VLR

HLR
PSTN

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 8-5

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Mobile to Land Sequence

Mobile to Land Sequence

Keys to the diagram

13 The subscriber pressing the "send" key initiates a "Channel Request" message from the MS to
the BSS. This is followed by the assignment of a dedicated control channel by the BSS and the
establishment of the signalling link between the MS and BSS (‘‘SABM" - Set Asynchronous
Balanced Mode).
2 The message "Request for Service" is passed to the MSC which relays it to the VLR. The VLR
will carry out the authentication process if the MS has been previously registered on this VLR -
if not, the VLR will have to obtain authentication parameters from HLR. The diagram assumes
the MS was previously registered on this VLR.
3 Subscriber authentication (optional) takes place using authentication messages and encryption
algorithms and, if successful the Call setup can continue. If ciphering is to be used this is
initiated at this time as the setup message contains sensitive information.
4 The message ‘‘Set-Up" is sent by the MS to the MSC accompanied by the call information (type
of call, and number being called etc.). The message is forwarded from the MSC to the VLR.
5 The MSC may initiate the MS IMEI check (is the MS stolen? etc). Note that this check may
occur later in the message sequence.
6 In response to the message ‘‘Set-Up" (sent at step 4), the VLR sends the message ‘‘Complete
Call" to the MSC, which notifies the MS with ‘‘Call Proceeding".
7 The MSC then assigns a traffic channel to the BSS (‘‘Assignment Command"), which in turn
assigns an air interface traffic channel. The MS responds to the BSS (which responds in turn
to the MSC) with ‘‘Assignment Complete".
8 An ‘‘Initial and Final Address Message (IFAM)" is sent to the PSTN. Ring tone is applied at
the MS in response to ‘‘Alerting", which the MSC sends to the MS when the PSTN responds
with an ‘‘Address Complete Message (ACM)".
9 When answered (‘‘Answer (ANS)" from the PSTN), the message ‘‘Connect" is forwarded to the
MS by the MSC, stopping the MS ring tone. The MSC then connects the GSM traffic channel to
the PSTN circuit, thus completing the end to end traffic connection.
10 Conversation takes place for the duration of the call.

8-6 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Mobile to Land Sequence Version Rev

Mobile to Land Sequence

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 8-7

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Land to Mobile Sequence

Land to Mobile Sequence

Key to the diagram

1 A C7 ‘‘Initial and Final Address Message (IFAM)" arrives at a "gateway" MSC (GMSC). The
MS to be called is identified by its MSISDN.
2 Using the message ‘‘Send Routing Info", still tagged by the MS’s MSISDN, the GMSC
requests routing information from the HLR. This forwards the message, now retagged with the
MS’s IMSI, to the VLR serving the LAI in which the MS is currently located. The requested
information will enable the GMSC to identify the MSC to which the IFAM must be directed.
3 The VLR responds with the message ‘‘Routing Information Ack.", now tagged with an MSRN
which is either newly drawn from its pool of MSRNs or already associated with the MS being
called. The GMSC now sends an IFAM to the MSC serving the MSs location, tagged with
the MSRN.
4 The ‘visitor’ MSC then requests call set-up information from the VLR (‘‘Send Info for I/C Call
Setup").
5 The VLR response is the "Page" message back to the MSC, containing the required information.
The MSC then sends ‘‘Paging Request" to the MS via the appropriate BSS.
6 The MS responds and requests a dedicated control channel from the BSS (‘‘Channel Request")
and the air interface signalling link is established. Once established, this dedicated control
channel carries ‘‘Paging Response" to the BSS which relays it to the VLR, via the MSC.

8-8 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Land to Mobile Sequence Version Rev

Land to Mobile Sequence

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 8-9

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Land to Mobile Sequence (cont.)

Land to Mobile Sequence (cont.)

Key to the diagram

7 The MS subscriber is authenticated and cipher mode is set (opt). The "Complete Call"
message is then sent to the MSC from the VLR. This is relayed to the MS via the BSS as
the message "Setup".
8 The MS sends the message "Call Confirmation" to the MSC. This indicates that the MS is
capable of receiving a call and the MSC sends an ‘‘Address Complete Message (ACM)" to the
GMSC which relays it to the PSTN. The land subscriber will now hear ring tone.
9 The MSC then assigns a traffic channel to the BSS (‘‘Assignment Command"), which in turn
assigns an air-interface traffic channel. The MS responds to the BSS (which responds in turn to
the MSC) with ‘‘Assignment Complete". The MS now rings, sending the message ‘‘Alert" to
the MSC as confirmation.
10 When the GSM subscriber answers, the MS sends the message "Connect" to the MSC. The
MSC acknowledges this (‘‘Connect Ack") and sends ‘‘Answer (ANS)" to the GMSC and PSTN.
The land subscriber’s ring tone stops and the GMSC and MSC connect the GSM traffic channel
and the PSTN circuit together.
11 Conversation takes place for the duration of the call.

8-10 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Land to Mobile Sequence (cont.) Version Rev

Land to Mobile Sequence

MS BSS MSC VLR HLR GMSC PSTN

<TMSI>
7 COMPLETE CALL
<SDCCH>
SETUP

<SDCCH>
8 CALL CONFIRMATION
RING TONE
ADDRESS COMPLETE (ACM) AT LAND
<SDCCH>
PHONE

ASSIGNMENT COMMAND
9 (channel)
<F ACCH>
(circuit)

ASSIGNMENT COMPLETE

ALERT RING TONE AT MS <F ACCH>

<TCH>

RINGING
STOPS
<F ACCH> AT LAND
SUBSCRIBER
PHONE
10 CONNECT PICKS UP
<F ACCH> BILLING
CONNECT ACK ANSWER (ANS) STARTS

<TCH>
11
"Hello... .

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 8-11

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev MS Initiated Call Clearing Sequence

MS Initiated Call Clearing Sequence

Key to the diagram

1 The MS initiates the clearing of the call by sending the "Disconnect" message to the MSC. The
MSC will then send a "Release" message to the PSTN which will then start to release the fixed
network circuits associated with the call . The MSC will also send a "Release" message to the
MS to indicate that it may clear down the call.
2 When the MS receives the message, it will release the call and respond with the "Release
Complete" message. The PSTN will also respond with a "Release Complete" message.
3 The MSC now initiates the freeing up of the air interface radio resources and the A interface
terrestrial resources related to the call. The MSC will send the "Clear Command" to the BSS.
The BSS in turn will send a "Channel Release" on to the MS this will start the release of the
radio resources used for that call. The BSS will then respond to the MSC with the "Clear
Complete" message indicating that is has released the radio and terrestrial resources.
4 The BSS will complete the release of the radio resources by sending the "DISC" message to
the MS. The MS will respond with an "Unnumbered Acknowledgement (UA)" message.
5 The MSC will now initiate the release of the signalling connection related to the call. The
MSC will send the "Released" message to the BSS, which will respond with the "Release
Complete" message.
6 The call is now cleared and all resources are available for another subscriber.

8-12 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MS Initiated Call Clearing Sequence Version Rev

Mobile Initiated Call Clearing Sequence

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 8-13

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Inter-BSS Handover Sequence

Inter-BSS Handover Sequence

Key to the diagram

1 The MS is in the conversation state and is continuously compiling measurements both of the
current transmission and the broadcast control channels of up to thirty two surrounding cells.
The measurements from the six best cells are reported back to the BSS, every 480 ms.
2 When a handover is required, due to low Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) or poor
signal quality the existing ‘‘originating" BSS (oBSS) notifies the MSC (‘‘Handover Required").
3 The target or ‘new‘ BSS (nBSS) is alerted with the message ‘‘Handover Request" tagged
with the TMSI.
4 The new BSS allocates a Handover Reference Number which it uses to determine whether the
correct MS gains access to the air interface channel which it allocates, and acknowledges the
MSC’s request with ‘‘Handover Request Ack". This is tagged with the HO Reference number.
The nBSS assigns a traffic channel.
5 The MSC, via the oBSS orders the MS to change to the new channel with the message
‘‘Handover Command" on FACCH.
6 There is an information interchange between nBSS and MS. This uses the FACCH channel
but an access burst is used. The messages and information carried depend upon the type of
handover being performed.
7 Once all necessary information has been transferred the message "Handover Complete"
is sent to the MSC.
8 The MSC now sends a "Clear Command" to the oBSS, this frees the radio resources for another
MS. The channel is not cleared until this point in case the new BSS can not accommodate
the MS being handed over.
9 The MS, still in the conversation mode, then continues to prepare periodic measurement
reports and sends them to the new BSS.

Acronyms:

TMSI Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity

MSRN Mobile Station Roaming Number
IMSI Internatinal Mobile Subscriber Identity
MS ISDN Mobile Station ISDN Number
LAI Local Area Identity
SACCH Slow Associated Control Channel
FACCH Fast Associated Control Channel

8-14 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Inter-BSS Handover Sequence Version Rev

Inter-BSS Handover Sequence

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 8-15

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Location Update Sequence

Location Update Sequence

Key to the diagram

1 A location update is initiated by the MS when it detects that it has entered a new location area.
The location area is transmitted on the BCCH as the LAI. The MS will be assigned an SDCCH
by the BSS, the location updating procedure will be carried out using this channel.
2 Once the SDCCH has been assigned, the MS transmits a "Location Update Request" message.
This message is received by the MSC which then sends the new LAI and the current MS TMSI
number to the VLR. The information will also be sent to the HLR if the MS has not previously
been updated on the network.
3 Authentication and ciphering may now take place if required.
4 The VLR will now assign a new TMSI for the MS, this number will be sent to the MSC using
the "Forward New TMSI" message. The VLR will now initiate the "Location Update Accept"
message which will transmit the new TMSI and LAI to the MS.
5 Once the MS has stored both the TMSI and the LAI on its SIM card it will send the "TMSI
Relocate Complete" message to the MSC. The MSC will then send the "TMSI ACK" message
to the VLR to confirm that the location update has been completed.
6 The SDCCH will then be released by the MS

8-16 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Location Update Sequence Version Rev

Location Update Sequence

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 8-17

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Authentication and Ciphering

Authentication and Ciphering

Key to the diagram

1 Authentication may be executed during call setup, location updating and supplementary
services. The HLR/AUC produce the authentication parameters (RAND/SRES/Kc) these are
called "triples". Triples are sent to the VLR where the MS is registered. These triples are sent in
groups of six and stored in the VLR. This ensures that the VLR can carry out the authentication
and that it will not have to contact the HLR.
2 The VLR initiates the authentication by sending a message "Authenticate" to the MSC. The
MSC will repackage this message and send it on to the MS. The message is an "Authentication
Request" and contains the random number RAND.
3 The MS responds with the "Authentication Response" message, this contains the signed
response (SRES).
4 If authentication is successful, the VLR will request that the MSC start ciphering procedures,
using the "Start Ciphering" message. This message contains information indicating whether
ciphering is required.
5 The MSC will start ciphering procedures by sending the "Cipher Mode Command" message to
the BSS. This message contains the encryption information required by the BSS. The BSS will
respond with the "Cipher Mode Complete" message.

Note:
If the authentication fails, the HLR will be notified and an "Authentication Reject"
message will be send to the MS.

8-18 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Authentication and Ciphering Version Rev

Authentication and Ciphering

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 8-19

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Authentication and Ciphering

Equipment Identification

Key to the diagram

1 Equipment Identification will be initiated by the MSC sending the "Equipment ID Request"
message to the MS. This will be carried out less frequently than authentication. The frequency
of the checks will be at the discretion of the network provider. Equipment Identification will be
carried out during a Location Update or a Call Setup.
2 The MS will respond to the message by sending the "ID Response" message. This message
contains the equipment’s IMEI number.
3 The MSC will send the IMEI number on to the EIR using the "Check IMEI" message. The EIR
will respond with the "Check IMEI Response". Checking of the IMEI at the EIR may occur
after the TCH has been allocated to the MS.

8-20 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Authentication and Ciphering Version Rev

Equipment Identification

MS BSS
S MSC VLR HLR PSTN EIR

<SDCCH>
1 EQUIPMENT ID REQUEST

2 ID RESPONSE <SDCCH>
(IMEI)

CHECK IMEI
3
CHECK IMEI RESPONSE

Note:
IMEI check may be deferred until after traffic channel has been established!

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 8-21

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Authentication and Ciphering

This page intentionally left blank.

8-22 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Introduction to Microcellular Version Rev

Chapter 9

Introduction to Microcellular

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 9-1

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Introduction to Microcellular

This page intentionally left blank.

9-2 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Introduction to Microcellular Version Rev

Introduction to Microcellular
Section Objectives
On completion of this section the student will be able to:
• State the purpose and function of a microcell.
• State the advantages of microcellular over other capacity enhancement techniques.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 9-3

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Introduction

Introduction
What is Microcell?
The term microcell suggests a small cell. This is true, but microcells are defined as
cells for which the antennas are mounted below local rooftop level. This helps contain
the microcells RF radiation to within the street canyons.

Why Deploy Microcells?

At present 80 to 90% of the current worldwide GSM subscribers fall into one category, that of
slow moving and stationary handportable units (class 4 mobiles).

9-4 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Introduction Version Rev

Microcellular Concept

The Microcellular principle has applications in:

- - GSM, DCS, PCS
- - Urban areas
- - In building systems

Microcellular offers independence of:

- - Frequency (using existing networks
ARFCNís)
- - Technology base (i.e. Any existing or future
hardware)
- - Products (for example, Motorola microcells
under another vendors
macrocells)

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 9-5

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev How are Microcells Deployed?

How are Microcells Deployed?

By placing the antenna below the rooftop, the RF propagation can be contained. This allows the
frequency reuse within the microcells coverage area to be tighter that in the existing network. This
means greater spectrum efficiency. The microcells are also deployed underneath the existing network.
This introduces the term, layered architecture. This would suggest that the current system cells become
"umbrella or macrocells". Therefore, in the area of macro- and microcell coverage we have enhanced
capacity. We can now say that the microcells have introduced better capacity and spectrum efficiency.
We could also assume that any areas of poor or no coverage in the existing network could also be
overcome by the use of microcells. This would mean that microcells can provide greater:
• Capacity
• Coverage
• Spectrum efficiency
or
• Km2
• MHz
Note:
One Erlang is a measure of one traffic channel permanently utilized.

9-6 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
How are Microcells Deployed? Version Rev

Layered Architecture

Top View
MACROCELL

Microcell A Microcell B

Side View
MACROCELL

Microcell A Microcell B

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 9-7

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Building Penetration from Externally Mounted Cells

Building Penetration from Externally Mounted Cells

For a cell with an outdoor mounted antenna, path loss defines the limit of possible coverage,
including building penetration losses and "on-street" path loss. This suggests that, as the distance
from the antenna increases, the depth of penetration into buildings will reduce.
There may be situations where a building further away has better indoor coverage, for example, due
to the fact that the angle of incidence to the building is more favourable for better penetration. The
level of penetration into a building depends on a number of factors some of which are:
• Building material.
• Number of windows.
• Angle of incidence.
• Internal structure.
A microcell could give enhanced coverage within a building, even if it is deployed primarily as an
external or on-street microcell. This aids providing the user with greater coverage.
Microcells may even be deployed within buildings, especially in larger indoor
areas (for example, conference centres etc.).

9-8 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Building Penetration from Externally Mounted Cells Version Rev

Building Penetration from Externally Mounted Cells

Bad in-building
penetration

Good in-building
coverage

Excellent in-building
coverage

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 9-9

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Antenna Types

Antenna Types
Both directional and omni-directional antennas have their uses in a microcellular system. The
different attributes of these antennas can be used by the cell planners to avoid shadows,
reduce handover requests, and maximize call success.

Directional Antennas
Directional antennas are useful for covering long streets and have the following advantages:
• Extra gain in the forward direction.
• Suppressed signal in the reverse direction, this is a useful characteristic if the cell is
a potential interferer with another cell located behind it.
It is also worth noting that a directional antenna could be used to improve in-building
coverage, in specific buildings, within the microcell area.

Omni Antennas
Omni antennas are useful for covering open areas (for example squares, plazas). In
these areas, it is desirable to have a clearly designated ‘best server’ cell to avoid
excessive handovers and their attendant problems.
Another application is to create a "corner crossroads" cell. This avoids having transient
cells at street crossroads. However, by intersecting with more streets, the potential
for interference with other cells may be increased.

9-10 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Antenna Types Version Rev

Antenna Types

Directional Antennas

Buildings
Antenna

Coverage

In-building coverage
improvement

Omni Antennas

Buildings
Antenna

Reduced co-channel
interference in Coverage
this direction

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 9-11

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev The Microcellular Solution

The Microcellular Solution

As the GSM network has evolved and matured, its traffic loading has increased as the number
of subscribers has grown. Eventually, the network could reach a point of traffic saturation. The
use of microcells can provide high traffic capacity in localized areas.
The use of microcells can alleviate the increase in congestion. Microcells could be stand-alone cells
to cover traffic "hotspots" or a contiguous coverage of cells in a combined architecture.

9-12 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
The Microcellular Solution Version Rev

The Microcellular Solution

Increased capacity and better coverage

Microcell coverage will provide better coverage where

conventional macrocells do not (blackspots)

On-street cells will in some case have better in-

building penetration than macrocells

- - dependant on individual site location etc.

Specific in-building cells may be implemented

Microcells can be used to supplement channel

capacity in areas of rapid traffic growth

Microcells offer ways of effectively covering areas of

non-homogenous traffic

Increased spectral efficiency

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 9-13

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Picocells

Picocells
The future capacity and coverage requirements of a network may require the introduction
of indoor cellular coverage. This may be provided by picocells. Picocells could offer further
capacity, coverage and quality enhancement to a network which has already deployed
microcells to provide on street coverage and capacity.

9-14 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Picocells Version Rev

Picocells

Cell 1

Cell 2

Cell 3

Cell 4

Cell 5

Cell 6

Cell 7

Each floor could have its own cell allowing MS to establish a call on the
top floor and maintain it whilst moving between floors.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 9-15

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Picocells

This page intentionally left blank.

9-16 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
CP02 Exercise Version Rev

Chapter 10

CP02 Exercise

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 10-1

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev CP02 Exercise

This page intentionally left blank.

10-2 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Exercise Version Rev

Exercise
Please answer all questions on the answer sheet provided.
1. Which network component provides switching and connection to other networks such as PSTN?
◦ Operation and Maintenance Centre

◦ Network Management Centre

◦ Base Station System

◦ Mobile Services Switching Centre

2. There are five criteria used by GSM to perform handovers, RF level, MS distance
and power budget are three, but what are the other two?
◦ Quality and power class of the mobile

◦ Quality and interference

◦ Interference and short message services

◦ Power class of the mobile and short message services

3. What feature will GSM use to double the number of traffic channels for the same bandwidth?
◦ Discontinuous transmission

◦ Half rate speech

◦ Higher data rates

◦ Phase two phones

4. The BSS has three main components, what are they?
◦ MS, MSC and OMC

◦ BSC, BTS and XCDR

◦ BSC, SCDR and MSC

◦ MSC, HLR and VLR

5. The BSC connects _____________ circuits to ____________ on the air
interface. (Fill in the blanks).
◦ The BSC connects DATA circuits to CONTROL BITS on the air interface.

◦ The BSC connects TERRESTRIAL circuits to FRAMES on the air interface.

◦ The BSC connects TERRESTRIAL circuits to CHANNELS on the air interface.

◦ The BSC connects RADIO circuits to CHANNELS on the air interface.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 10-3

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Exercise

6. The XCDR converts _____ kbps voice circuits to GSM defined _____
kbps channels. (Fill in the blanks).
◦ The XCDR converts 64 kbps voice circuits to GSM defined 16 kbps channels

◦ The XCDR converts 120 kbps voice circuits to GSM defined 16 kbps channels

◦ The XCDR converts 9600 kbps voice circuits to GSM defined 2400 kbps channels

◦ The XCDR converts 64 kbps voice circuits to GSM defined 120 kbps channels
7. Which network elements use the OML signalling link?
◦ MSC and MS

◦ BSC and BTS

◦ OMC and BSC

◦ BTS and MSC

8. The Message Transfer Link (MTL) carries signalling information between the MSC
and BSC. Which signalling protocol does the MTL use?
◦ X.25

◦ LAPB

◦ C7

◦ LAPD
9. What type of burst is used to carry Traffic or Control information and is bi-directional?
◦ Frequency correction

◦ Normal

◦ Dummy

◦ Access
10. Which type of coding provides error protection and increases the number of
bits to be transmitted by a factor of 1:2?
◦ Speech and data coding

◦ Encryption coding

◦ convolutional coding

◦ Parity bit coding

11. Interleaving spreads the contents of a coded speech or data block over a number of air interface
bursts to provide error protection. What type of interleaving is used for speech blocks?
◦ Diagonal

◦ Rectangular

◦ Both

◦ Cyclic

10-4 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Exercise Version Rev

12. What is the maximum timing advance that can be ordered at the mobile station?
◦ 4.615 mS

◦ 233uS

◦ 3 timeslots

◦ 577uS
13. Which one of the following is NOT a technique to combat the effects of multi-path fading?
◦ Frequency hopping

◦ Equalisation

◦ Diversity

◦ Sectorisation
14. The duration of a timeslot on the Air Interface is 577uS. What is the duration of a burst?
◦ 20mS

◦ 577uS

◦ 546uS

◦ 4.615mS
15. Which of the following channels carries measurement information from a mobile during a call?
◦ SACCH

◦ SDCCH

◦ BCCH

◦ TCH
16. Which logical channel is used by the mobile station for its first access to the cellular system?
◦ FACCH

◦ RACH

◦ SACCH

◦ AGCH
17. Which timeslots in the TDMA frame can be used to carry DCCH channels?
◦ Any

◦ Zero

◦ 1-7

◦ 0, 2, 4, and 6

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 10-5

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Exercise

18. Which logical channel assigns an SDCCH to a mobile station?

◦ FACCH

◦ RACH

◦ SACCH

◦ AGCH
19. What is the best location for a Microcell antenna?
◦ Outside, below roof top level

◦ Outside, on top of the roof

◦ Inside the building

◦ As close to the BTS as possible

20. What name is given to a cell located inside a building?
◦ Erlang

◦ Picocell

◦ Nanocell

◦ Macrocell

10-6 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Exercise

This page intentionally left blank.

10-7 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Notes Page

Notes Page

10-8 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Notes Page Version Rev

CP02 Introduction to Digital Cellular

Please write clearly and answer all questions on this answer sheet.
Name: _________________________
Date: _________________________
Company: _________________________
Country: _________________________
Please mark once per question in the relevant box.

QUESTION A B C D
NUMBER

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Percentage:

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 10-9

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Notes Page

This page intentionally left blank.

10-10 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Appendix 1 (GSM History & Organization) Version Rev

Chapter 11

Appendix 1 (GSM History &

Organization)

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 11-1

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Appendix 1 (GSM History & Organization)

This page intentionally left blank.

11-2 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM History Version Rev

GSM History
Frequency Band Reserved for Cellular (1979)
Due to the increasing use of radio communications throughout Europe, the frequency spectrum
was becoming congested and cluttered. Some bandwidth needed to be set aside if a Europe
wide cellular system was ever to become a reality. At the World Administrative Radio Conference
(WARC) of 1979, the frequency band to be used was agreed upon. Since then, many analogue
systems have come into service in Europe (Sweden-1981, UK-1985 etc).

"Groupe Special Mobile" Created Within CEPT (1982)

In 1982, the Conference of European Posts and Telecommunications Administrations (CEPT)
established a committee called "Groupe Speciale Mobile" (GSM). This committee was set up to
specify a unique radio communication system for Europe, this system was to be called GSM.
Four working parties were set up to specify the different parts of the GSM system.

"Permanent Nucleus" Established (1986)

The GSM committee met regularly and eventually it was decided that a permanent body was
required. In 1986 a small team of full time members was established in Paris. This team were
to co-ordinate the working parties and manage the edition and updating of the specifications.
(There are now 130 recommendations divided into 12 series)

ETSI takes over GSM (1988)

In 1988 the European Telecommunications Standard Institute (ETSI) was created. This institute
took over most of the technical standardization activities of CEPT including GSM. The introduction
of ETSI enabled network providers and telecommunications equipment manufacturers to become
involved in the specification of GSM. The GSM Recommendations were now renamed the
‘Interim ETSI Technical Specifications‘ to comply with the ETSI standards.
Also, in1988 the first invitations to tender were issued for GSM equipment. Motorola was awarded
contracts for validation systems in the UK, Germany, Spain and Scandinavia.

Phase 1 GSM Recommendations Frozen (1990)

The first phase of the Recommendations for GSM were frozen in 1990 to enable
development of the first GSM systems.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 11-3

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM History

GSM History

Date Task Completion

1979 Europe wide frequency band set aside for cellular.

1982 “Groupe Special Mobile” is created within CEPT.

1986 GSM has full time team in Paris.

1988 ETSI takes over GSM Committee.

First Tender invitations made.

1990 The phase 1 GSM Recommendations are frozen.

11-4 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM History Version Rev

GSM Changes to SMG (1991/1992)

In January 1991 phase 1 issue of DCS 1800 was approved by ETSI-GSM
At the end of 1991 the GSM committee was given responsibility for the next generation of
mobile communications equipment. To avoid confusion between the GSM system and the GSM
committee with its wider responsibilities, the committee was renamed ‘Special Mobile Group‘ (SMG)
in 1992. The SMG committees are now responsible for GSM, Digital Communication System
(DCS)1800 and the Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS).
Also during this year, the GSM System was renamed. Rather than being called "Groupe Special
Mobile" it was now named "Global System for Mobile Communications". The name was changed
to make the product attractive to a world-wide market rather than a Europe-wide market, as was
the initial intention. The acronym GSM was retained to avoid confusion.

GSM is launched (1992)

Commercial service for some major cities started in 1992, these are now firmly established. The
aim is to have GSM networks available along ‘‘corridors" linking major cities. The introduction of
GSM has occurred at different rates throughout the various participating countries.

Phase 2 GSM Technical Specifications Frozen (1993)

Several major changes have been made to the GSM technical specifications since phase 1 was
frozen in 1990. These changes include rewriting a number of specifications to remove ambiguities
and faults. Many specifications have also been extended to detail new services and features.
The GSM Recommendations have now passed through the appropriate ETSI procedures
and may now be referred to as "ETSI Technical Specifications". These procedures involve
public enquiries and voting and the process takes several months.

GSM Coverage
GSM is widely used throughout the world, both GSM900/DCS1800.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 11-5

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM History

GSM History

Date Task Completion

1991 DCS1800 phase 1 recommendation frozen.

GSM committee takes on next generation radio

communication systems (UMTS).

1992 The GSM committee is renamed “Special Mobile Group”

GSM System is renamed “Global System for Mobile

Communications”.

1992 GSM is launched for commercial operations.

1993 The phase 2 GSM technical specifications are frozen.

World’s first personal communication network (DCS1800) launched in

UK in September.

1994 GSM commercial operations coverage world-wide exceeded GSM

committee expectations (Russia, China, India, Middle East, Far East).

1995 DCS1800 commercial operations launched in Thailand, Qatar and

United Kingdom.

GSM System declared as the ‘Gateway’ for Iridium Satellite System.

1996 Introduction of microcellular techniques in GSM900/DCS1800

networks.

11-6 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM History

This page intentionally left blank.

11-7 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev SMG Subsidiary Bodies

SMG Subsidiary Bodies

Overview
The SMG committee specifies all aspects of GSM. There are seven main sub- committees which
meet several times per year to discuss and update the technical specifications that relate to their
areas of concern. Each committee is responsible for a number of specifications.
The permanent nucleus is responsible for the co-ordination and release of the specifications.
This group is now referred to as ETSI Project Team #12 (PT12).

The Technical Specifications

The scope of the technical specifications, and the committees that are responsible
for them, are shown in the tables opposite.

11-8 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
SMG Subsidiary Bodies Version Rev

GSM Committees

Committee Committee Responsibility Technical

Name Specifications
SMG1 Definition of Services 01 ,02

SMG2 Specification of Radio Transmission 03, 05, 06

SMG3 Network Architecture, 03, 04, 08, 09

Signalling Protocols, Open Interfaces

SMG4 Data Services 07

SMG5 UMTS -

SMG6 Operation and Maintenance 12

11 Series Test Specification 11

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 11-9

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM History & Organisation

GSM History & Organisation

The GSM Memorandum of Understanding (MoU)
The technical specifications make up only part of the definition for GSM. Since so
many countries are working together on this one system, commercial and operational
aspects must also be taken into account.
A Memorandum of Understanding was put together which covered a number of items not
covered by the technical specifications, these are listed below:
Timescales.
• Procurement.
• Routing plans.
• System deployment.
• Tariff principles.
• Concerted service introduction.
• Roaming agreements.
This memorandum was first signed in 1987 by operators and regulatory bodies in the
participating countries. The MoU was updated in 1991.
Australia was the first non-European country to sign the the MoU many others
have also signed since then.

11-10 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM History & Organisation Version Rev

GSM Technical Specifications

Specification Specification Coverage

Series
Number
00 Preamble

01 General

02 Service aspects

03 Network aspects

04 MS-BS interface and protocols

05 Physical layer in the radio path

06 Audio aspects

07 Terminal adaptors for Mobile Stations

08 BTS/BSC and BSC/MSC interfaces

09 Network interworking

10 Service interworking

11 Equipment specification and type approval specification

12 Network management (including O&M)

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 11-11

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM History & Organisation

GSM Coverage
GSM has been widely accepted throughout the world.
International roaming is available between many of the networks, and more agreements
are added constantly as new networks go live.
A list of GSM networks is given opposite.

11-12 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
GSM History & Organisation Version Rev

GSM Coverage
Andorra Macao
Australia Malaysia
Austria Malta
Bahrain Monaco
Belgium Morocco
China Namibia
Cyprus New Zealand
Denmark Nigeria
Egypt Norway
Estonia Oman
Finland Pakistan
France Philippines
Gibraltar Portugal
Germany Qatar
Great Britain Rumania
Greece Russia
Holland Saudi Arabia
Hong Kong Singapore
Hungary Slovenia
Iceland South Africa
India Spain
Indonesia Sri Lanka
Iran Sweden
Ireland Switzerland
Israel Syria
Italy Taiwan
Kuwait Thailand
Latvia Turkey
Lebanon UAE
Liechtenstein Uganda
Luxembourg Vietnam

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 11-13

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev GSM History & Organisation

This page intentionally left blank.

11-14 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

Chapter 12

Glossary of technical terms

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-1

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

This page intentionally left blank.

12-2 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

Glossary of technical terms

This Glossary of technical terms contains standard Motorola acronyms, abbreviations
and numbers used throughout the documentation set.

A Interface - AUTO

A Interface Interface between MSC and BSS. The interface is based on the
use of one or more E1/T1 digital links. The channels on these
links can be used for traffic or signalling.
A3 Authentication algorithm that produces SRES, using RAND and
Ki.
A38 A single algorithm performing the function of A3 and A8.
A5 Stream cipher algorithm, residing on an MS, that produces
ciphertext out of plaintext, using Kc.
A8 Ciphering key generating algorithm that produces Kc using
RAND and Ki.
AB See Access Burst.
Abis interface Interface between a remote BSC and BTS. Motorola offers
a GSM standard and a unique Motorola Abis interface. The
Motorola interface reduces the amount of message traffic and
thus the number of 2 Mbit/s lines required between BSC and BTS.
ABR Answer Bid Ratio. The ABR is the ratio of successful calls to total
number of calls. As a measure of effective calls, it reflects the
performance of the total network
ac-dc PSM AC-DC Power Supply module.
ac Alternating Current. In electricity, AC occurs when charge
carriers in a conductor or semiconductor periodically reverse their
direction of movement. Household utility current in most countries
is AC with a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz (complete cycles
per second). The RF current in antennas and transmission lines
is another example of AC. An AC waveform can be sinusoidal,
square, or sawtooth-shaped. Some AC waveforms are irregular
or complicated. Square or sawtooth waves are produced by
certain types of electronic oscillators, and by a low-end UPS
when it is operating from its battery.
AC Access Class (C0 to C15).
AC Application Context.
ACC Automatic Congestion Control. A method by which congested
switches automatically communicate their congestion level to
other switches.
Access Burst The Access Burst is used by the MS to access the BTS. It carries
RACH uplink from the MS to the BTS to start a call.
ACCH Associated Control CHannel. Control information associated with
TCH or DCCH.
ACK, Ack ACKnowledgement.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-3

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

ACM Accumulated Call meter. The ACM is a function contained within

the SIM. It accumulates the total units (in the home currency) for
both the current call and all preceding calls. For security reasons,
the SIM only allows the value of the ACM to be incremented,
not decremented. Resetting of the ACM is only possible after
entering PIN2.
ACM Address Complete Message.
ACPIM AC Power Interface Module. Used in M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS
equipment.
AC PSM AC Power Supply Module. Used in M-Cell6 BTS equipment.
ACSE Association Control Service Element. The ACSE is one of the
three Application Service Elements (ASE) which reside in the
application layer of the OSI protocol and act as an interface to the
lower layer protocols. It is used by applications to create a title
for identification. See also ASI and ROSE.
ACU Antenna Combining Unit.
A/D Analogue to Digital (converter). See ADC.
ADC ADministration Centre.
ADC Analogue to Digital Converter. A device that converts a signal
that is a function of a continuous variable into a representative
number sequence carrying equivalent information.
ADCCP Advanced Data Communications Control Protocol. A bit-oriented
data-link-layer (DL) protocol used to provide point-to-point and
point-to-multipoint transmission of data frames that contain
error-control information. Note: ADCCP closely resembles
high-level data link control (HDLC).
ADM ADMinistration processor.
ADMIN ADMINistration.
ADN Abbreviated Dialling Number. Abbreviated dialling is a telephone
service feature that (a) permits the user to dial fewer digits to
access a network than are required under the nominal numbering
plan, and (b) is limited to a subscriber-selected set of frequently
dialled numbers.
ADPCM Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation. Differential
pulse-code modulation (DPCM) in which the prediction algorithm
is adjusted in accordance with specific characteristics of the input
signal.
AE Application Entity. The system-independent application activities
that are made available as application services to the application
agent.
AEC Acoustic Echo Control. In a system, the reduction of the power
level of an echo or the elimination of an echo.
AEF Additional Elementary Functions.
AET Active Events Table. Alarms and events are sent to the Events
Log in the GUI. Different operators will have different subscription
lists. All alarms and events are sent to the AET before they are
re-routed to different subscription lists.
AFC Automatic Frequency Control. A device or circuit that maintains
the frequency of an oscillator within the specified limits with
respect to a reference frequency.

12-4 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

AFN Absolute Frame Number.

AGC Automatic Gain Control. A process or means by which gain is
automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a function of a
specified parameter, such as received signal level.
AGCH Access Grant CHannel. A GSM common control channel used to
assign MS to a SDCCH or a TCH.
Ai Action indicator.
AI Artificial Intelligence. A branch of computer science whose goal
is to develop electronic devices that can operate with some of the
characteristics of human intelligence. Among these properties
are logical deduction and inference, creativity, the ability to make
decisions based on past experience or insufficient or conflicting
information, and the ability to understand natural language.
AIB Alarm Interface Board.
AIO A class of processor.
Air interface The radio link between the BTS and the MS.
AL See Application Layer.
AM Amplitude Modulation. Modulation in which the amplitude of a
carrier wave is varied in accordance with some characteristic
of the modulating signal.
AMA Automatic Message Accounting (processor). A service feature
that automatically records data regarding user-dialled calls.
AMR Adaptive Multi-Rate. The capability of operating at gross bit-rates
of 11.4 kbit/s (half-rate) and 22.8 kbit/s (full-rate) over the air
interface.
AM/MP Cell broadcast mobile terminated message. A message
broadcast to all MSs in a cell.
ANSI American National Standards Institute. ANSI is the
primary organisation for fostering the development
of technology standards in the United States.
ANSI works with industry groups and is the U.
S. member of ISO and the IEC. Long established
computer standards from ANSI include ASCII and SCSI.
Antenna A transmitter/receiver which converts electrical currents into RF
and vice versa. In GSM systems, transmits and receives RF
signals between the BTS and MS.
AoC Advice of Charge.
AoCC Advice of Charge Charging supplementary service.
AoCI Advice of Charge Information supplementary service.
AOC Automatic Output Control.
AP Application Process.
Application Layer See OSI RM. The Application Layer is the highest of seven
hierarchical layers. It interfaces directly to, and performs common
application services for, the application processes. It also issues
requests to the Presentation Layer. The common application
services provide semantic conversion between associated
application processes.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-5

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number. The GSM available

frequency is divided in two bands. Each band is divided into
200kHz slots called ARFCN. Each ARFCN is shared between
8 mobiles, each using it in turn. Each mobile uses the ARFCN
for one TS (Timeslot) and then waits for its turn to come around
again. A mobile has use of the ARFCN once per the TDMA
frame. The combination of a TS number and ARFCN is called a
physical channel.
ARQ Automatic Repeat-reQuest. Error control for data transmission in
which the receiver detects transmission errors in a message and
automatically requests a retransmission from the transmitter.
ARP Address Resolution Protocol. A Transmission Control Protocol
/ Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol that dynamically binds a
Network Layer (NL) IP address to a Data Link Layer (DL) physical
hardware address, e.g., Ethernet address.
ASCE Association Control Service Element. An ASE which provides
an AP with the means to establish and control an association
with an AP in a remote NE. Maps directly onto the Presentation
layer (OMC).
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is
a standard developed by ANSI to define how computers write
and read characters. It is the most common format for text files
in computers and on the Internet. In an ASCII file, alphabetic,
numeric, and special characters are represented with a 7-binary
digit binary number. 128 possible characters are defined. UNIX
and DOS-based operating systems (except for Windows NT) use
ASCII for text files. Windows NT uses a newer code, Unicode.
IBM’s System 390 servers use a proprietary 8-bit code called
extended binary-coded decimal interchange code. Conversion
programs allow different operating systems to change a file from
one code to another.
ASE Application Service Element (OMC). A coherent set of integrated
functions to help accomplish application communication, e.g.,
within an application entity (AE).
ASE Application Specific Entity (TCAP).
ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notation One. A formal notation used
for describing data transmitted by telecommunications
protocols, regardless of language implementation and physical
representation of these data, whatever the application, whether
complex or very simple.
ASP Alarm and Status Panel.
ASR Answer Seizure Ratio. The percentage of calls that are
completed successfully.
ATB All Trunks Busy. An equipment condition in which all trunks
(paths) in a given trunk group are busy.
Ater The interface between XCDR and BSC.
ATI Antenna Transceiver Interface.
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A high-speed multiplexing and
switching method utilising fixed-length cells of 53 octets to
support multiple types of traffic.
ATT (flag) ATTach.

12-6 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

ATTS Automatic Trunk Testing Subsystem. Ensures the quality of

telephone lines by means of a series of tests. ATTS can be
initiated by either an operator command or by a command file,
which can be activated at a predetermined time.
AU Access Unit.
AUC Authentication Centre. A GSM network entity which provides the
functionality for verifying the identity of an MS when requested by
the system. Often a part of the HLR.
AUT(H) AUThentication.
AUTO AUTOmatic mode.

B Interface - Byte

B Interface Interface between MSC and VLR.

BA BCCH Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated in a
cell for BCCH transmission.
BAIC Barring of All Incoming Calls supplementary service.
BAOC Barring of All Outgoing Calls supplementary service.
Baud The unit in which the information carrying capacity or signalling
rate of a communication channel is measured. One baud is one
symbol (state transition or level-transition) per second. This
coincides with bits per second only for two-level modulation with
no framing or stop bits
BBBX Battery Backup Board.
BBH Base Band Hopping. Method of frequency hopping in which each
transceiver at the base station is tuned to a different frequency,
and the signal is switched to a different transceiver for each burst.
BCC Base station Colour Code. The BCC and the NCC are part of the
BSIC. The BCC comprises three bits in the range 000 to 111.
See also NCC and BSIC.
BCCH Broadcast Control CHannel. A GSM control channel used to
broadcast general information about a BTS site on a per cell or
sector basis.
BCD Binary Coded Decimal. The representation of a decimal digit by a
unique arrangement of no fewer than four binary digits.
BCF Base station Control Function. The GSM term for the digital
control circuitry which controls the BTS. In Motorola cell sites this
is a normally a BCU which includes DRI modules and is located
in the BTS cabinet.
B channel Bearer channel. Used in ISDN services to carry 64kbit/s of data,
when used at full capacity.
BCIE Bearer Capability Information Element. Specific GSM parameters
in the Setup message are mapped into a BCIE for signalling to
the network and within the PLMN. The BCIE is used to request a
bearer service (BS) from the network.
BCU Base station Control Unit. A functional entity of the BSS which
provides the base control function at a BTS site. The term no
longer applies to a type of shelf (see BSC and BSU).
BCUP Base Controller Unit Power.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-7

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

BEP Bit Error Probability.

BER Bit Error Rate. The number of erroneous bits divided by the total
number of bits transmitted, received, or processed over some
stipulated period. The BER is usually expressed as a coefficient
and a power of 10; for example, 25 erroneous bits out of 100,000
bits transmitted would be 25 out of 105 or 25 x 10-5.
BES Business Exchange Services.
BFI Bad Frame Indication. An indication of unsuccessfully decoded
speech frames. See FER.
BH Busy Hour. In a communications system, the sliding 60-minute
period during which occurs the maximum total traffic load in a
given 24-hour period.
BHCA Busy Hour Call Attempt. A statistic based on call attempts that a
switch processes during a BH. See also BH.
BI Barring of all Incoming call supplementary service.
BIB Balanced-line Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12
balanced (6-pair) 120 ohm (37-pin D-type connector) lines for 2
Mbit/s circuits. See also T43.
BIC-Roam Barring of all Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the Home
PLMN Country supplementary service.
Bi-directional neighbour See Reciprocal neighbour..
BIM Balanced-line Interconnect Module.
Bin From BINary. An area in a data array used to store information.
Also, a name for a directory that contain files stored in binary
format.
BL BootLoad. Also known as download. For example, databases
and software can be downloaded to the NEs from the BSS.
BLER Block Error Rate
BLLNG BiLLiNG.
bit Binary digit. A character used to represent one of the two states
or digits (0 or 1) in the numeration system with a radix of two.
Also, a unit of storage capacity.
bit/s Bits per second (bps). A measure of data transmission speed.
The number of binary characters (1s or 0s) transmitted in one
second. For example, an eight-bit parallel transmission link which
transfers one character (eight bits) per second is operating at
8 bps.
block A group of bits (binary digits) transmitted as a unit, over which a
parity check procedure is applied for error control purposes.
Bm Full rate traffic channel. See also Full Rate.
BN Bit Number. Number which identifies the position of a particular
bit period within a timeslot.
BPF Bandpass Filter. A filter that ideally passes all frequencies
between two non-zero finite limits and bars all frequencies not
within the limits.
BPSM µBCU Power Supply Module.

12-8 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

BRI Basic Rate Interface. An ISDN multipurpose user interface

allowing simultaneous voice and data services provided over
two clear 64 kb/s channels (B channels) and one clear 16 kb/s
channel (D channel). The interface is also referred to as 2B+D.
BS Base Station. See BSS.
BS Basic Service (group).
BS Bearer Service. A type of telecommunication service that
provides the capability for the transmission of signals between
user-network interfaces. The PLMN connection type used to
support a bearer service may be identical to that used to support
other types of telecommunication service.
BSC Base Station Controller. A network component in the GSM PLMN
which has the digital control function of controlling all BTSs. The
BSC can be located within a single BTS cabinet (forming a BSS)
but is more often located remotely and controls several BTSs
(see BCF, BCU, and BSU).
BSG Basic Service Group.
BSIC Base Transceiver Station Identity Code. Each cell has a BSIC. It
is a local colour code that allows a mobile station to distinguish
between different neighbouring base stations. The BSIC is an
octet, consisting of three bits for the Network Colour Code (NCC)
and three bits for the Base station Colour Code (BCC). The
remaining two bits are unused. See also NCC and BCC.
BSIC-NCELL BSIC of an adjacent cell.
BSP Base Site control Processor (at BSC).
BSN Backward Sequence Number. A field in a signal unit (SU) that
contains the forward sequence number (FSN) of a correctly
received signal unit being acknowledged in the signal unit that is
being returned to the sender. See also FSN and SU.
BSS Base Station System. The system of base station equipment
(Transceivers, controllers and so on) which is viewed by the
MSC through a single interface as defined by the GSM 08
series of recommendations, as being the entity responsible for
communicating with MSs in a certain area. The radio equipment
of a BSS may cover one or more cells. A BSS may consist of one
or more base stations. If an internal interface is implemented
according to the GSM 08.5x series of recommendations, then the
BSS consists of one BSC and several BTSs.
BSSAP BSS Application Part (part of SS7) . Protocol for LAPD or
LAPB signalling links on the A-interface. Comprises DTAP
and BSSMAP messages. Supports message communication
between the MSC and BSS.
BSSC Base Station System Control cabinet. The cabinet which houses
one or two BSU shelves at a BSC or one or two RXU shelves at a
remote transcoder (RXCDR).
BSSMAP Base Station System Management Application Part (part of SS7).
Call processing protocol for A-interface messages exchanged
between the MSC and BSS. The BSS interprets these messages.
BSSOMAP BSS Operation and Maintenance Application Part (part of SS7).
BSU Base Station Unit shelf. The shelf which houses the digital
control modules for the BTS (part of BTS cabinet) or BSC (part
of BSSC cabinet).

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-9

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

BT British Telecom.
BT Bus Terminator. In order to avoid signal reflections on the bus,
each bus segment has to be terminated at its physical beginning
and at its end with the characteristic impedance.
BTC Bus Terminator Card.
BTF Base Transceiver Function.
BTP Base Transceiver Processor (at BTS). One of the six basic task
groups within the GPROC.
BTS Base Transceiver Station. A network component in the GSM
PLMN which serves one cell, and is controlled by a BSC. The
BTS contains one or more Transceivers (TRXs).
Burst A period of modulated carrier less than one timeslot. The physical
content of a timeslot.
Byte A sequence of adjacent binary digits operated upon as a unit.
Generally consists of eight bits, usually presented in parallel. A
byte is usually the smallest addressable unit of information in a
data store or memory.

C - CW

C Conditional.
C Interface Interface between MSC and HLR/AUC.
C7 See SS7.
CA Cell Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated to a
particular cell.
CA Central Authority. Software process that controls the BSS.
CAB Cabinet.
CADM Country ADMinistration. The Motorola procedure used within
DataGen to create new country and network files in the DataGen
database.
CAI Charge Advice Information.
CAT Cell Analysis Tool. The CAT is part of the Motorola Cell
Optimization product. It is intended for engineering staff and
OMC administrators. CAT provides information about GSM
network cell performance.
CB Cell Balancer. The CB process balances the cells configured for
GPRS across PRPs. In the event of a PRP outage, this process
sends message(s) indicating that GPRS service is unavailable to
the appropriate CRM(s) for the cells that could not be moved to
an INS (IN Service) PRP.
CB Cell Broadcast. See CBSMS.
CB Circuit Breaker.
CBA Cell Broadcast Agent.
CBC Cell Broadcast Centre. The call processing centre for CBSMS
messages.
CBCH Cell Broadcast CHannel. The channel which is used to broadcast
messages to all MSs in a specific cell.

12-10 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

CBF Combining Bandpass Filter.

CBL Cell Broadcast Link. A bi-directional data link which allows
communications between the BSS and the CBC.
CBM Circuit Breaker Module.
CDMA Code-Division Multiple Access. CDMA is a digital cellular
technology that uses spread-spectrum techniques. Unlike
competing systems, such as GSM, that use TDM, CDMA does
not assign a specific frequency to each user. Instead, every
channel uses the full available spectrum. Individual conversations
are encoded with a pseudo-random digital sequence.
CBMI Cell Broadcast Message Identifier.
CBS Cell Broadcast Service. See CBSMS.
CBSMS Cell Broadcast Short Message Service. CBSMS allows a number
of unacknowledged general messages to be broadcast to all MSs
within a particular region. The content may include information
such as local traffic conditions, the weather, the phone number of
the local taxi company, etc. The messages are sent from a CBC
via a BSC to a BTS and from there on a special cell broadcast
channel to the MSs. The CBC is considered as a node outside
the PLMN and can be connected to several BSCs. However, a
BSC is only connected to one CBC.
CBUS Clock Bus.
CC Connection Confirm. Part of SCCP network connectivity.
CC Country Code. A one to three digit number which specifically
identifies a country of the world that an international call is being
routed to (e.g., 1 = North America, 44 = United Kingdom).
CC Call Control. CC functions, such as number translations and
routeing, matrix path control, and allocation of outgoing trunks
are performed by the MSC.
CCB Cavity Combining Block, a three way RF combiner. There are
two types of CCB, CCB (Output) and CCB (Extension). These,
with up to two CCB Control cards, may comprise the TATI. The
second card may be used for redundancy.
CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber supplementary service.
CCCH Common Control CHannels. A class of GSM control channels
used to control paging and grant access. Includes AGCH, PCH,
and RACH.
CCCH_GROUP Group of MSs in idle mode.
CCD Common Channel Distributor.
CCDSP Channel Coding Digital Signal Processor.
CCF Conditional Call Forwarding. See CFC.
CCH Control CHannel. Control channels are channels which carry
system management messages.
CCH Council for Communications Harmonization (referred to in GSM
Recommendations).
CCITT Comité Consultatif International Télégraphique et Téléphonique.
This term has been superseded. See ITU-TSS.
CCM Current Call Meter.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-11

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

CCP Capability/Configuration Parameter.

CCPE Control Channel Protocol Entity.
CCS Hundred call-seconds. A single call lasting one hundred seconds
is one CCS. Also, a measure of traffic load obtained by multiplying
the number of calls per hour by the average holding time per call
expressed in seconds, and dividing by 100. Often used in practice
to mean hundred call seconds per hour with "per hour" implied;
as such, it is a measure of traffic intensity. See also erlang.
CCU Channel Codec Unit. The CCU performs the following functions:
Channel coding functions, including FEC and interleaving, Radio
channel measurement functions, including received quality level,
received signal level, and information related to timing advance
measurements.
Cct Circuit.
CDB Control Driver Board.
CDE Common Desktop Environment. Part of the SUN software
(crontab - cron job file).
CDR Call Detail Record. A record of voice or data SVCs, which
includes calling and called numbers, local and remote node
names, data and timestamp, elapsed time, and call failure class
fields. This is the information needed to bill the customer for calls
and facility usage data for calls.
CD-ROM Compact Disk-Read Only Memory.
CDUR Chargeable DURation.
CEB Control Equalizer Board (BTS).
CED Called station identifier.
CEIR Central Equipment Identity Register.
Cell By GSM definition, a cell is an RF coverage area. At an
omni-site, cell is synonymous with site; at a sectored site, cell is
synonymous with sector. This differs from analogue systems
where cell is taken to mean the same thing as site. (See below)

12-12 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

1 Cell =
1 sector

Omni Site 6-Sector Site

1-Cell Site or
(1 BTS) 6-Cell Site
(6 BTSs)

CEND End of charge point. The time at which the calling, or called, party
stops charging by the termination of the call or by an equivalent
procedure invoked by the network or by failure of the radio path.
CEPT Conférence des administrations Européennes des Postes et
Telecommunications.
CERM Circuit Error Rate Monitor. Identifies when discontinuity is
detected in a circuit. An alarm is generated and sent to the
OMC-R when the error count exceeds an operator specified
threshold. The alarm identifies the RCI or CIC and the path
where the error is detected.
CF Conversion Facility.
CF Call Forwarding. A feature available to the mobile telephone
user whereby, after initiation of the feature by an authorised
subscriber, calls dialled to the mobile telephone of an authorised
subscriber will automatically be routed to the desired number.
See also CFC and CFU.
CF Control Function. CF performs the SGSN mobility management
functions and OA&M functions for the GSN module.
CFB Call Forwarding on mobile subscriber Busy supplementary
service. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for phone
busy situations.
CFC Call Forwarding Conditional supplementary service. Service
automatically redirects incoming calls for busy, no reply, or not
reachable situations. See also CFB, CFNRc, and CFNRy.
CFM Configuration Fault Management RSS process.
CFNRc Call Forwarding on mobile subscriber Not Reachable
supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incoming
calls for not reachable situations.
CFNRy Call Forwarding on No Reply supplementary service. Service
automatically redirects incoming calls for no reply situations.
CFU Call Forwarding Unconditional supplementary service. Service
automatically redirects all incoming calls.
CG Charging Gateway.
CGF Charging Gateway Function.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-13

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

Channel A means of one-way transmission. A defined sequence of

periods (for example, timeslots) in a TDMA system; a defined
frequency band in an FDMA system; a defined sequence of
periods and frequency bands in a frequency hopped system.
CIM Coaxial Interconnect Module.
Channel Mode See Full Rate and Half Rate. These are the channel modes
that are currently used.
CHP CHarging Point.
CHV Card Holder Verification information.
CKSN Ciphering Key Sequence Number. The CKSN is a number which
is associated with the ciphering key, Kc. It is used to ensure
authentication consistency between the MS and the VLR.
CI Cell Identity. A block of code which identifies a cell within a
location area.
CI CUG Index.
C/I Carrier to Interference ratio.
CIC Circuit Identity Code. The unique identifier of the terrestrial
portion of a circuit path. A CIC is either a 64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/s
connection depending on whether a site has local or remote
transcoding. A CIC with local transcoding occupies a complete
E1/T1 timeslot. A 16 kbit/s CIC, at a site with remote transcoding,
occupies a sub-channel of an E1/T1 timeslot.
CIR, C/I Carrier to Interference Ratio. Indicates the received signal power
level relative to the interference power level.
Ciphertext Unintelligible data produced through the use of encipherment.
CKSN Ciphering Key Sequence Number.
CLI Calling Line Identity. The identity of the caller. See also CLIP
and CLIR.
CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation supplementary service.
Allows the called party to identify the caller. See also CLIR.
CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction supplementary service.
Allows the caller to withhold their identity from the called party.
See also CLIP.
CLK Clock.
CLKX Clock Extender half size board. The fibre optic link that distributes
GCLK to boards in system (part of the BSS, etc).
CLM ConnectionLess Manager. Coordinates global control over
the BSS by handling of all connectionless messages (that is,
messages that are not directly concerned with a connected call).
This includes such messages as global resets, load limiting and
circuit blocking.
CLR CLeaR.
CM Configuration Management. Configuration management allows
the operator to perform network configuration tasks, and to
maintain all details of the network configuration at the OMC.
CM Connection Management. See CLM.
CM Connectionless Manager. See CLM.
CMD CoMmanD.

12-14 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

CMM Channel Mode Modify. Message sent to an MS to request a

channel mode change. When it has received the CMM message,
the MS changes the mode to the indicated channel and replies
with a Channel Mode Modify Acknowledge message indicating
the new channel mode.
CMIP Common Management Information Protocol. Protocol used for
communication over the OML.
CMISE Common Management Information Service Element. An ASE
which provides a means to transfer management information via
CMIP messages with another NE over an association established
by ASCE using ROSE (OMC).
CMR Cellular Manual Revision. Documentation updates.
CNG CalliNg tone.
Codec Coder/Decoder. A speech coding unit that converts speech into a
digital format for radio broadcast, and vice versa.
CODEX Manufacturer’s name for a type of multiplexer and packet switch
commonly installed at the Motorola OMC-R.
Coincident Cell A cell whose cell boundary follows the boundary of a co-located
neighbour cell. The coincident cell has a different frequency type,
but the same BSIC, as that of the neighbour cell.
COLI COnnected Line Identity. Identity of the connected line. See also
COLP and COLR.
Collocated Placed together; two or more items together in the same place.
Colour Code An 8-bit code assigned to a BTS to distinguish interfering signals
from another cell.
COLP COnnected Line Identification Presentation supplementary
service. Allows the calling party to identify the line identity of the
connected party. See also COLR.
COLR COnnected Line Identification Restriction supplementary service.
Allows the connected party to withhold its line identity from the
calling party. See also COLP.
COM Code Object Manager (software).
COM COMplete.
COMB Combiner. The purpose of a combiner in the BSS is to combine
transmitter outputs from the RCUs onto an antenna.
COMM, Comms COMMunications.
CommHub Communications Hub. Provides Ethernet switching and IP
routeing for the GSN complex local networking and GSN complex
E1 interfaces to the public data network.
CommsLink Communications Link. See also 2 Mbit/s link.
Compact PCI See cPCI.
CONF CONFerence circuit. Circuit used for multi-party conference calls.
CONFIG CONFIGuration Control Program.
Congestion Situation occurring when an element cannot receive all the
service it is requesting.
CONNACK CONNect ACKnowledgement. Part of the synchronization
process. After a connection has been established, the CONNACK
message indicates that traffic channels are available.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-15

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

CP Call Processing. The CP process in the BTS controls the MS to

BSS to MS signalling link, MS originated and terminated calls
and inter-BSS and inter-BTS handovers.
cPCI Compact Peripheral Component Interconnect. A set of standards
that define a common card cage, power supplies, and processor
boards.
CPGM CCCH Paging Manager. The CPGM processes the paging
messages sent from the SGSN to the BSC/BTS.
CPS Code and Puncturing Scheme.
CPU Central Processing Unit. The portion of a computer that controls
the interpretation and execution of instructions. Also, the portion
of a digital communications switch that executes programmed
instructions, performs arithmetic and logical operations on
signals, and controls input/output functions.
C/R Command/Response field bit.
CR Carriage Return (RETURN).
CR Connection Request (Part of SCCP network connectivity). An
SCCP Connection Request message is sent from the BSS to the
MSC to establish a connection. See also CREF.
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check (3 bit). An error-detection scheme that
(a) uses parity bits generated by polynomial encoding of digital
signals, (b) appends those parity bits to the digital signal, and
(c) uses decoding algorithms that detect errors in the received
digital signal.
CRE Call RE-establishment procedure. Procedure for re-establishing
a call in the event of a radio link failure.
CREF Connection REFused (Part of SCCP network connectivity). In
a number of operating circumstances, a CREF message may
be sent from the MSC to the BSS in response to a Connection
Request (CR).
CRM Cell Resource Manager. The CRM allocates and activates
timeslots and subchannels on the available carriers.
CRM Cell Resource Machine.
CRM-LS/HS Cellular Radio Modem-Low Speed/High Speed. Low speed
modem used to interwork 300 to 2400 bit/s data services under
V.22bis, V.23, or V.21 standards. High speed modem used to
interwork 1200 to 9600 bit/s data services under V.22bis, V.32,
or V.29/V.27ter/V.21 standards.
CRO Motorola Controlled Roll Out Group. A CRO consists of a
customer site implementation of a new product, software release,
or combination of products/releases.
CRT Cathode Ray Tube (video display terminal).
CS Circuit Switched.
CS-1 GPRS Coding Scheme-1 (9.05 kbit/s per TCH).
CS-2 GPRS Coding Scheme-2 (13.4 kbit/s per TCH).
CS-3 GPRS Coding Scheme-3 (15.6 kbit/s per TCH).
CS-4 GPRS Coding Scheme-4 (21.4 kbit/s per TCH).

12-16 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

CSFP Code Storage Facility Processor (at BSC and BTS). A GPROC
device which facilitates the propagating of new software instances
with reduced system down time. See also IP.
CSP Central Statistics Process. The statistics process in the BSC.
CSPDN Circuit Switched Public Data Network. A publicly available
communications network using circuit switched digital data
circuits.
CT Call Transfer supplementary service.
CT Channel Tester.
CT Channel Type.
CTP Call Trace Product (Tool). The CTP is designed to help operators
of GSM900 and DCS1800 communication networks tune and
optimize their systems. CTP allows Call Trace data to be
analysed and decoded.
CTP Control Terminal Port.
CTR Common Technical Regulation.
CTS Clear to Send. A handshake signal used with communication
links, especially RS232 or CCITT Rec. V.24, to indicate (to a
transmitter from a receiver) that transmission may proceed.
Generated in response to a request to send signal. See also RTS.
CTU Compact Transceiver Unit (M-Cellhorizon radio).
CUG Closed User Group supplementary service. A CUG is used
to control who can receive and/or place calls, by creating a
unique group. When a CUG is configured for an interface, only
those subscribers that are members of the same CUG can
receive/place calls.
Cumulative value The total value for an entire statistical interval.
CW Call Waiting supplementary service. A subscriber feature which
allows an individual mobile telephone user currently engaged in a
call to be alerted that another caller is trying to reach him. The
user has a predetermined period of time in which to terminate the
existing conversation and respond to the second call.

D Interface - DYNET

D Interface Interface between VLR and HLR.

D/A Digital to Analogue (converter). See DAC.
DAB Distribution Alarm Board (in BTS6 cabinet).
DAC Digital to Analogue Converter. A device that converts an input
number sequence into a function of a continuous variable.
DACS Digital Access Cross-connect System. A data concentrator and
organizer for Tl / El based systems.
DAK Downlink Acknowledgement
DAN Digital ANnouncer (for recorded announcements on MSC).
DAS Data Acquisition System.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-17

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

DAT Digital Audio Tape. Audio-recording and playback medium/format

that maintains a signal quality equal to that of the CD-ROM
medium/format.
DataGen Sysgen Builder System. A Motorola offline BSS binary object
configuration tool.
Data Link Layer See OSI RM. This layer responds to service requests from the
Network Layer and issues service requests to the Physical Layer.
It provides the functional and procedural means to transfer data
between network entities and to detect and possibly correct
errors that may occur in the Physical Layer.
dB Decibel. A unit stating the logarithmic ratio between two numeric
quantities. See also dBm.
DB DataBase.
DB Dummy Burst (see Dummy burst).
DBA DataBase Administration/Database Administrator.
dBm A dB referenced to 1 milliwatt; 0 dBm equals one milliwatt.
DBMS DataBase Management System.
dc Direct Current. DC is the unidirectional flow or movement of
electric charge carriers, usually electrons. The intensity of the
current can vary with time, but the general direction of movement
stays the same at all times. As an adjective, the term DC is used
in reference to voltage whose polarity never reverses.
DCB Diversity Control Board (part of DRCU).
DCCH Dedicated Control CHannel. A class of GSM control channels
used to set up calls and report measurements. Includes SDCCH,
FACCH, and SACCH.
DCD Data Carrier Detect signal. Hardware signal defined by the
RS-232-C specification that indicates that a device such as a
modem is on-line and ready for transmission.
DCE Data Circuit terminating Equipment. The DCE performs
functions such as signal conversion and coding, at the
network end of the line between the DTE and the line.
Also, The RS232 configuration designated for computers. DCE
equipment can be connected to DTE equipment with a straight
cable, but to other DCE equipment only with a null modem cable.
DCF Data Communications Function.
DCF Duplexed Combining bandpass Filter. (Used in Horizonmacro).
D channel Data channel. Used in ISDN to perform call signalling and
connection setup functions. In some circumstances, the channel
can also be used to carry user data.
DCN Data Communications Network. A DCN connects Network
Elements with internal mediation functions or mediation devices
to the Operations Systems.
DC PSM DC Power Supply Module.
DCS1800 Digital Cellular System at 1800 MHz. A cellular phone network
using digital techniques similar to those used in GSM 900, but
operating on frequencies of 1710 - 1785 MHz (receive) and
1805 - 1880 MHz (transmit).

12-18 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

DDF Dual-stage Duplexed combining Filter. (Used in Horizonmacro).

The DDF is an integrated combiner, filter and duplexer.
DDS DataGen Data Store. Store area for DataGen input and output
files.
DDS Data Drive Storage.
DDS Direct Digital Synthesis. A technology for generating highly
accurate and frequency-agile (rapidly changeable frequency over
a wide range), low-distortion output waveforms.
DEQB Diversity Equalizer Board.
DET DETach.
DFE Decision Feedback Equalizer. A receiver component/function.
The DFE results in a very sharp Bit Error Rate (BER) threshold
by using error feedback.
DGT Data Gathering Tool. The DGT collects all the relevant data
relating to a specified problem and copies it to tape or file,
together with a problem description. The file or tape is then sent
to Motorola for analysis.
DHP Digital Host Processor. A hard GPROC based device located
at Horizonmicro2 BTS sites. It represents the MCU of a slave
Horizonmicro2 FRU. The MCU that the DHP represents is
responsible for providing DRI and carrier support.
DIA Drum Intercept Announcer.
DINO E1/HDSL Line termination module (part of Horizonmicro).
DINO T1 Line termination module (part of Horizonmicro).
DISC DISConnect.
Discon Discontinuous.
DIQ Diversity In phase and Quadrature phase.
DIR Device Interface Routine. Software routine used in the BSS.
DL Data Link (layer). See Data Link Layer.
DL See Downlink.
DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier. In frame-relay transmission
systems, 13-bit field that defines the destination address of a
packet. The address is local on a link-by-link basis.
DLD Data Link Discriminator.
DLNB Diversity Low Noise Block.
DLS DownLink Segmentator. The DLS segments LLC frames into
RLC data blocks to be transmitted over the air interface.
DLSP Data Link Service Process. Handles messages for an OMP and
a shelf GPROC.
DLSP Digital Link Signalling Processor.
Dm Control channel (ISDN terminology applied to mobile service).
DMA Deferred Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; an
immediate or deferred response is required (see also PMA).

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-19

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

DMA Direct Memory Access. Transfer of data from a peripheral device,

such as a hard disk drive, into memory without that data passing
through the microprocessor. DMA transfers data into memory at
high speeds with no processor overhead.
DMR Digital Mobile Radio.
DMX Distributed Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorola’s networked
EMX family).
DN Directory Number.
DNIC Data Network Identifier Code. In the CCITT International X.121
format, the first four digits indicate the international data number,
the next three digits are the data country code, and the final digit
is the network code.
DNS Domain Name Service. A service that translates from logical
domain or equipment names to IP addresses.
Downlink Physical link from the BTS towards the MS (BTS transmits, MS
receives).
DP Dial/Dialled Pulse. A dc pulse produced by an end instrument that
interrupts a steady current at a sequence and rate determined
by the selected digit and the operating characteristics of the
instrument.
DPC Destination Point Code. A part of the label in a signalling
message that uniquely identifies, in a signalling network, the
(signalling) destination point of the message.
DPC Digital Processing and Control board.
DPCM Pulse-code modulation (PCM) in which an analog signal is
sampled and the difference between the actual value of each
sample and its predicted value, derived from the previous sample
or samples, is quantified and converted, by encoding, to a
digital signal. Note: There are several variations of differential
pulse-code modulation.
DPNSS Digital Private Network Signalling System (BT standard for PABX
interface).
DPP Dual Path Preselector. BTS module.
DPR, DPRAM Dual Port Random Access Memory.
DPROC Data PROCessor.
DPSM Digital Power Supply Module.
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory. A type of semiconductor
memory in which the information is stored in capacitors on a
integrated circuit.
DRC Data Rate Converter board. Provides data and protocol
conversion between PLMN and destination network for 8 circuits.
Part of IWF.
DRCU Diversity Radio Channel Unit. Contains transceiver, digital control
circuits, and power supply. Part of the BSS.
DRI Digital Radio Interface. Provides encoding/decoding and
encryption/decryption for radio channels. Part of BSS.
DRIM Digital Radio Interface extended Memory. A DRI with extra
memory.

12-20 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

DRIX DRI Extender half size board. Fibre optic link from DRI to BCU.
Part of the BSS.
DRX, DRx Discontinuous reception (mechanism). A means of saving battery
power (for example in hand-portable units) by periodically and
automatically switching the MS receiver on and off.
DS-1 Digital transmission System 1 (or Digital Signal
level 1). Term used to refer to the 1.44 Mbit/s (U.
S.) or 2.108 Mbit/s (Europe) digital signal carried on a T1 facility.
DS-2 German term for 2 Mbit/s line (PCM interface).
DSE Data Switching Exchange.
DSI Digital Speech Interpolation. A compression technique that relies
on the pauses between speech bursts to provide additional
compression. DSI enables users to gain an additional 2:1
compression on the average on their line.
DSO 64 kbit/s timeslot on an E1/T1.
DSP Digital Signal Processor. A specialized, programmable computer
processing unit that is able to perform high-speed mathematical
processing.
DSS1 Digital Subscriber Signalling No 1. N-ISDN user network interface
signalling.
DSSI Diversity Signal Strength Indication.
DTAP Direct Transfer Application Part (Part of SS7). Call processing
protocol for A-Interface messages exchanged directly between
the MSC and the mobile unit without interpretation by the BSS.
DTE Data Terminal Equipment. An end instrument that
converts user information into signals for transmission
or reconverts the received signals into user information.
Also, the RS232 configuration designated for terminals. DTE
equipment can be connected to DCE with a straight cable, but to
other DTE equipment only with a null modem.
DTF Digital Trunk Frame. A frame or electronic rack of digital trunk
interface equipment.
DT1 DaTa form 1 (Part of SCCP network connectivity).
DTI Digital Trunk Interface.
DTM Dual Transer Mode.
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency. Multifrequency signalling in which
specified combinations of two voice band frequencies, one from a
group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four
higher frequencies, are used. The sounds a push button tone
telephone makes when it dials a number.
DTR Data Terminal Ready signal. Method of flow control (RS232
Interface). A modem interface control signal sent from the DTE
to the modem, usually to indicate to the modem that the DTE is
ready to transmit data.
DTRX Dual Transceiver Module. (Radio used in Horizonmicro
(M-Cellarena) and Horizonmacro (M-Cellarenamacro)).

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-21

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

DTX, DTx Discontinuous Transmission (mechanism). A means of saving

battery power (for example in hand-portable units) and reducing
interference by automatically switching the transmitter off when
no speech or data are to be sent.
Dummy burst A period of carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation is a
defined sequence that carries no useful information. A dummy
burst fills a timeslot with an RF signal when no information is
to be delivered to a channel.
DYNET DYnamic NETwork. Used to specify BTSs sharing dynamic
resources.

E - EXEC

E See Erlang.
E1 Also known as CEPT1. The 2.048 Mbit/s rate used by European
CEPT carrier to transmit 30 64 kbit/s digital channels for voice
or data calls, plus a 64 kbit/s signalling channel and a 64 kbit/s
channel for framing and maintenance.
E Interface Interface between MSC and MSC.
EA External Alarm. See EAS. Typical external alarms are: Door
open, High humidity, Low humidity, Fire, Intruder.
EAS External Alarm System. The EAS is responsible for the monitoring
of all customer-defined environmental alarms at a site. The
customer defines the alarm string and the severity of the alarms
based on the individual requirements of the site. Indications are
provided when the alarms are set or cleared.
Eb/No Energy per Bit/Noise floor, where Eb is the signal energy per bit
and No is the noise energy per hertz of noise bandwidth.
EBCG Elementary Basic Service Group.
EC Echo Canceller. Performs echo suppression for all voice circuits.
If cancellation does not take place, the PLMN subscriber hears
the voice signal as an echo, due to the total round-trip delay
introduced by the GSM system (typically 180 ms).
ECB Provides echo cancelling for telephone trunks for 30 channels
(EC).
ECID The Motorola European Cellular Infrastructure Division.
ECM Error Correction Mode. A facsimile mode, in which the sending
machine will attempt to send a partial page up to four times.
Ec/No Ratio of energy per modulating bit to the noise spectral density.
ECT Event Counting Tool. The ECT provides information about the
number and type of events and alarms generated throughout the
network. It extracts data from the event log files for specified
dates, allowing the user to generate reports on individual network
elements, groups of elements, or the whole network.
ECT Explicit Call Transfer supplementary service. ECT enables a
user to connect two other parties with which he is engaged in a
telephone call and leave the connection himself.
EDGE Enhanced Data-rates for Global Evolution.
EEL Electric Echo Loss.

12-22 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. An

EEPROM is a special type of PROM that can be erased by
exposing it to an electrical charge. Like other types of PROM,
EEPROM retains its contents even when the power is turned off.
EGPRS Enhanced GPRS.
EGSM900 Extended GSM900. EGSM900 provides the BSS with a further
range of frequencies for MS and BSS transmit. EGSM MSs can
use the extended frequency band as well as the primary band,
while non-EGSM MSs cannot use the extended frequency band.
A GSM900 cell can contain both GSM900 and EGSM900 carrier
hardware. EGSM operates on the frequency range, 880 - 915
MHz (receive) and 925 - 960 MHz (transmit).
EI Events Interface. Part of the OMC-R GUI.
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance.
EIR Equipment Identity Register. The EIR contains a centralized
database for validating the IMEI. The register consists of lists of
IMEIs organised as follows: White List - IMEIs which are known
to have been assigned to valid MS equipment. Black List - IMEIs
which have been reported stolen or which are to be denied service
for some other reason. Grey List - IMEIs which have problems
(for example, faulty software). These are not, however, sufficiently
significant to warrant a black listing.
EIRP Effective Isotropically Radiated Power. The arithmetic product of
the power supplied to an antenna and its gain.
EIRP Equipment Identity Register Procedure.
EL Echo Loss.
EM Event Management. An OMC-R application. It provides a
centralised facility for reporting network-wide generated events
and alarms, and for monitoring the status of the Network.
EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility. The ability of systems, equipment,
and devices that utilize the electromagnetic spectrum to operate
in their intended operational environments without suffering
unacceptable degradation or causing unintentional degradation
because of electromagnetic radiation or response.
EMF Electro Motive Force. The rate at which energy is drawn from a
source that produces a flow of electricity in a circuit; expressed
in volts.
EMI Electro Magnetic Interference. Any electromagnetic disturbance
that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the
effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
eMLPP enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emption service. This
service has two parts: precedence and pre-emption. Precedence
involves assigning a priority level to a call in combination with
fast call set-up. Pre-emption involves the seizing of resources,
which are in use by a call of a lower precedence, by a higher level
precedence call in the absence of idle resources. Pre-emption
can also involve the disconnection of an on-going call of lower
precedence to accept an incoming call of higher precedence.
EMMI Electrical Man Machine Interface.
EMX Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorola’s MSC family).

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-23

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

en bloc Fr. - all at once (a CCITT #7 Digital Transmission scheme);

En bloc sending means that digits are sent from one system to
another ~ (that is, all the digits for a given call are sent at the same
time as a group). ~ sending is the opposite of overlap sending.
A system using ~ sending will wait until it has collected all the
digits for a given call before it attempts to send digits to the next
system. All the digits are then sent as a group.
EOP Enhanced One-Phase
EOT End of Tape.
EPCR EGPRS Packet Channel Request.
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. EPROM is a type of
memory that retains its contents until it is exposed to ultraviolet
light. The ultraviolet light clears its contents, making it possible to
re-program the memory.
EPSM Enhanced Power Supply Module. Used in +27 V positive earth
cabinets.
EQ50 Static model against which the performance of the equalizer is
tested to extremes. See also TU3, TU50, HT100 and RA250.
EQB Equalizer Board. Control circuit for equalization for 8 time slots
each with equalizing circuitry and a DSP.
EQCP Equalizer Control Processor.
EQDSP Equalizer Digitizer Signal Processor.
Equalization The process by which attenuation and/or phase shift is rendered
essentially constant over a band of frequencies, even though the
transmission medium or the equipment has losses that vary with
frequency.
Equalizer An electrical network in which attenuation (or gain) and/or
phase shift varies as a function of frequency. Used to provide
equalization.
Erlang International (dimensionless) unit of traffic intensity defined as
the ratio of time a facility is occupied to the time it is available
for occupancy. One erlang is equal to 36 CCS. In the US this is
also known as a traffic unit (TU).
ERP Ear Reference Point. Facility for assessing handset and headset
acoustic responses.
ERP Effective Radiated Power. The power supplied to an antenna
multiplied by the antenna gain in a given direction.
ERR ERRor.
ESP Electro-static Point. Connection point on the equipment for an
anti-static wrist strap.
ESQL Embedded SQL (Structured Query Language). An RDBMS
programming interface language.
E-TACS Extended TACS (analogue cellular system, extended).
Ethernet A standard protocol (IEEE 802.3) for a 10 Mbit/s baseband local
area network (LAN) bus using carrier-sense multiple access
with collision detection (CSMA/CD) as the access method,
implemented at the Physical Layer in the OSI RM, establishing
the physical characteristics of a CSMA/CD network.
ETR ETSI Technical Report.

12-24 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

ETS European Telecommunication Standard.

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
ETX End of Transmission.
EXEC Executive Process.

F Interface - Full Rate

F Interface Interface between MSC and EIR.

FA Fax Adaptor. Device which complements Group 3 facsimile
apparatus in order to be able to communicate over a GSM
PLMN.
FA Full Allocation.
FA Functional Area.
FAC Final Assembly Code.
FACCH Fast Associated Control Channel. A GSM dedicated control
channel which temporarily uses the TCH to perform high speed
transmissions, and carries control information after a call is set
up. See also SDCCH.
FACCH/F Fast Associated Control Channel/Full rate. See also Full Rate.
FACCH/H Fast Associated Control Channel/Half rate. See also Half Rate.
FB See Frequency correction burst.
FBM Flow control Buffer Management. FBM is a functional unit
residing on the PRP. It controls buffer capacity for each cell
and each mobile so that the incoming data from the SGSN
matches the air throughput.
FC-AL Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop. A serial data transfer
architecture. FC-AL is designed for mass storage devices and
other peripheral devices that require very high bandwidth.
Using optical fibre to connect devices, FC-AL supports
full-duplex data transfer rates of 100MBps.
FCCH Frequency Correction CHannel. A GSM broadcast control
channel which carries information for frequency correction of
the MS.
FCP Fault Collection Process. Part of the fault management process
in the BTS.
FCS Frame Check Sequence. The extra characters added to a
frame for error detection and correction.
FDM Frequency Division Multiplex. A multiplexing technique that
uses different frequencies to combine multiple streams of data
for transmission over a communications medium. FDM assigns
a discrete carrier frequency to each data stream and then
combines many modulated carrier frequencies for transmission.
FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access. The use of frequency
division to provide multiple and simultaneous transmissions
to a single transponder.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-25

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

FDN Fixed Dialling Number. The fixed dialling feature limits dialling
from the MS to a pre-determined list maintained on the SIM
card. It can be used to limit calling to certain areas, exchanges
or full phone numbers.
FDP Fault Diagnostic Procedure.
FEC Forward Error Correction. Correction of transmission errors by
transmitting additional information with the original bit stream.
If an error is detected, the additional information is used to
recreate the original information.
FEP Front End Processor. An OMC-R device. The FEP is a driver
that stores data in its own database about all of the sites in the
system. All bursts from the sites are directed to the FEP. It can
also interrogate the sites and collect its data either manually or
automatically at pre-defined times.
FER Frame Erasure Ratio. The ratio of successfully decoded good
speech frames against unsuccessfully decoded bad frames.
FFS, FS For Further Study.
FH See Frequency Hopping.
FHI Frequency Hopping Indicator.
FIB Forward Indicator Bit. Used in SS7 - Message Transfer Part.
The forward indicator bit and backward indicator bit together
with the forward sequence number and backward sequence
number are used in the basic error control method to perform
the signal unit sequence control and acknowledgement
functions.
FIFO Memory logic device in which the information placed in the
memory in a given order is retrieved in that order.
FIR Finite Impulse Response (filter type).
FK Foreign Key. A database column attribute; the foreign key
indicates an index into another table.
FM Fault Management (at OMC).
FM Frequency Modulation. Modulation in which the instantaneous
frequency of a sine wave carrier is caused to depart from
the centre frequency by an amount proportional to the
instantaneous value of the modulating signal.
FMIC Fault Management Initiated Clear. An alarm type. If an FMIC
alarm is received, the fault management software for the
network item clears the alarm when the problem is solved. See
also Intermittent and OIC.
FMUX Fibre optic MUltipleXer module.
FN Frame Number. Identifies the position of a particular TDMA
frame within a hyperframe.
FOA First Office Application. A full functional verification of new
product(s) on a commercial system using accepted technology
and approved test plans.
FOX Fibre Optic eXtender board.
FR See Full Rate.

12-26 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

FR Frame Relay. An interface protocol for statistically

multiplexed packet-switched data communications in which
(a) variable-sized packets (frames) are used that completely
enclose the user packets they transport, and (b) transmission
rates are usually between 56 kb/s and 1.544 Mb/s (the T-1 rate).
Frame A set of consecutive Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) time slots
containing samples from all channels of a group, where the
position of each sample is identified by reference to a frame
alignment signal. Also, an information or signal structure which
allows a receiver to identify uniquely an information channel.
Frame Alignment The state in which the frame of the receiving equipment is
synchronized with respect to that of the received signal to
accomplish accurate data extraction.
FRU Field Replaceable Unit. A board, module, etc. which can be
easily replaced in the field with a few simple tools.
Frequency Correction Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation
bit stream allows frequency correction to be performed easily
within an MS burst.
Frequency Hopping The repeated switching of frequencies during radio transmission
according to a specified algorithm. Frequency hopping
improves capacity and quality in a highly loaded GSM network.
Multipath fading immunity can be increased by using different
frequencies and interference coming from neighbour cells
transmitting the same or adjacent frequencies can be reduced.
FS Frequency Synchronization. All BSS frequencies and timing
signals are synchronized to a high stability reference oscillator
in the BSS. This oscillator can free run or be synchronized to
the recovered clock signal from a selected E1/T1 serial link.
MSs lock to a reference contained in a synchronization burst
transmitted from the BTS site.
FSL Free Space Loss. The decrease in the strength of a radio
signal as it travels between a transmitter and receiver. The
FSL is a function of the frequency of the radio signal and the
distance the radio signal has travelled from the point source.
FSN Forward Sequence Number. See FIB.
FTAM File Transfer, Access, and Management. An ASE which
provides a means to transfer information from file to file. (OMC).
ftn forwarded-to number.
FTP Fault Translation Process (in BTS).
FTP File Transfer Protocol. A client-server protocol which allows
a user on one computer to transfer files to and from another
computer over a TCP/IP network. Also the client program the
user executes to transfer files.
Full Rate Refers to the current capacity of a data channel on the GSM
air interface, that is, 8 simultaneous calls per carrier. See also
HR - Half Rate.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-27

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

G Interface - GWY

G Interface Interface between VLR and VLR.

Gateway MSC An MSC that provides an entry point into the GSM PLMN
from another network or service. A gateway MSC is also an
interrogating node for incoming PLMN calls.
GB, Gbyte Gigabyte. 230 bytes = 1,073,741,824 bytes = 1024 megabytes.
GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter Converter for connection to the
Gigabit Ethernet.
GBL Gb Link.
GBM Gb Manager.
GCLK Generic Clock board. System clock source, one per site (part
of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR).
GCR Group Call Register. The register which holds information
about VGCS or VBS calls.
GDP Generic DSP Processor board. Interchangeable with the
XCDR board.
GDP E1 GDP board configured for E1 link usage.
GDP T1 GDP board configured for T1 link usage.
GDS GPRS Data Stream.
GGSN Gateway GPRS Support Node. The GGSN provides internet
working with external packet-switched networks.
GHz Giga-Hertz (109).
GID Group ID. A unique number used by the system to identify a
user’s primary group.
GIP GPRS Initialization Process
GMB GSM Multiplexer Board (part of the BSC).
GMM GPRS Mobility Management.
GMR General Manual Revision.
GMSC Gateway Mobile-services Switching Centre. See Gateway
MSC.
GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying. The modulation technique
used in GSM.
GND GrouND.
GOS Grade of Service. A traffic statistic defined as the percentage
of calls which have a Probability of Busy or Queueing Delay.
An alternative criterion is a maximum time for a percentage
of calls to wait in the busy queue before they are assigned a
voice channel.
GPA GSM PLMN Area.
GPC General Protocol Converter.
GPROC Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a
68030 with 4 to 16 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF,
RXCDR).
GPROC2 Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a
68040 with 32 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR).

12-28 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

{4354} GPROC3 Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board:

a 68060 with 128 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF,
RXCDR).
GPRS General Packet Radio Service. A GSM data transmission
technique that does not set up a continuous channel from a
portable terminal for the transmission and reception of data, but
transmits and receives data in packets. It makes very efficient
use of available radio spectrum, and users pay only for the
volume of data sent and received.
GPS Global Positioning by Satellite. A system for determining
position on the Earth’s surface by comparing radio signals from
several satellites.
GR Gb Router.
GSA GSM Service Area. The area in which an MS can be reached
by a fixed subscriber, without the subscriber’s knowledge of the
location of the MS. A GSA may include the areas served by
several GSM PLMNs.
GSA GSM System Area. The group of GSM PLMN areas accessible
by GSM MSs.
GSD GSM Systems Division.
GSL GPRS Signalling Link.
GSM Groupe Spécial Mobile (the committee).
GSM Global System for Mobile communications (the system).
GSM900 See PGSM.
GSM MS GSM Mobile Station.
GSM PLMN GSM Public Land Mobile Network.
GSM RF GSM Radio Frequency.
GSN GPRS Support Node. The combined functions provided by
the SGSN and GGSN.
GSN Complex A GSN Complex consists of an ISS Cluster, GGSN and SGSNs
connected to a single CommHub.
GSR GSM Software Release.
GT Global Title. A logical or virtual address used for routing SS7
messages using SCCP capabilities. To complete message
routing, a GT must be translated to a SS7 point code and
subsystem number.
GTM Gb Transmit Manager.
GTE Generic Table Editor. The Motorola procedure which allows
users to display and edit MCDF input files.
GTS GBRS TBF Scheduler
Guard period Period at the beginning and end of timeslot during which MS
transmission is attenuated.
GUI Graphical User Interface. A computer environment or program
that displays, or facilitates the display of, on-screen options.
These options are usually in the form of icons (pictorial
symbols) or menus (lists of alphanumeric characters) by means
of which users may enter commands.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-29

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

GUI client A computer used to display a GUI from an OMC-R GUI

application which is being run on a GUI server.
GUI server A computer used to serve the OMC-R GUI application process
running locally (on its processor) to other computers (GUI
clients or other MMI processors).
GWM GateWay Manager.
GWY GateWaY (MSC/LR) interface to PSTN.

H Interface - Hyperframe

H Interface Interface between HLR and AUC.

H-M Human-Machine Terminals.
HAD, HAP HLR Authentication Distributor.
Half Rate Refers to a type of data channel that will double the current
GSM air interface capacity to 16 simultaneous calls per carrier
(see also FR - Full Rate).
HANDO, Handover HANDOver. The action of switching a call in progress from
one radio channel to another radio channel. Handover allows
established calls to continue by switching them to another
radio resource, as when an MS moves from one BTS area to
another. Handovers may take place between the following
GSM entities: timeslot, RF carrier, cell, BTS, BSS and MSC.
HCU Hybrid Combining Unit. (Used in Horizonmacro). Part of
the DDF, the HDU allows the outputs of three radios to be
combined into a single antenna.
HDLC High level Data Link Control. A link-level protocol used to
facilitate reliable point-to-point transmission of a data packet.
Note: A subset of HDLC, LAP-B, is the layer-two protocol for
CCITT Recommendation X.25.
HDSL High bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line. HDSL is a data
transmission mechanism which supports duplex high speed
digital communication (at E1 rates) on one or more unshielded
twisted pair lines.
HLC High Layer Compatibility. The HLC can carry information
defining the higher layer characteristics of a teleservice active
on the terminal.
HLR Home Location Register. The LR where the current location
and all subscriber parameters of an MS are permanently stored.
HMS Heat Management System. The system that provides
environmental control of the components inside the ExCell,
TopCell and M-Cell cabinets.
HO HandOver. See HANDO.
HPU Hand Portable Unit. A handset.
HOLD Call hold supplementary service. Call hold allows the
subscriber to place a call on hold in order to make another call.
When the second call is completed, the subscriber can return
to the first call.
HPLMN Home PLMN.
HR See Half Rate.

12-30 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

HS HandSet.
HSI/S High Speed Interface card.
HSM HLR Subscriber Management.
HSN Hopping Sequence Number. HSN is a index indicating the
specific hopping sequence (pattern) used in a given cell. It
ranges from 0 to 63.
HT100 Hilly Terrain with the MS travelling at 100 kph. Dynamic model
against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be
measured. See also TU3, TU50, RA250 and EQ50.
HU Home Units. The basic telecommunication unit as set by the
HPLMN. This value is expressed in the currency of the home
country.
HW Hardware.
Hybrid Combiner A combiner device which requires no software control and is
sufficiently broadband to be able to cover the GSM transmitter
frequency band. See also COMB.
Hybrid Transformer A circuit used in telephony to convert 2-wire operation to
4-wire operation and vice versa. For example, every land-line
telephone contains a hybrid to separate earpiece and
mouthpiece audio and couple both into a 2-wire circuit that
connects the phone to the exchange.
Hyperframe 2048 superframes. The longest recurrent time period of the
frame structure.

I - IWU

I Information frames. Part of RLP.

IA Incoming Access supplementary service. An arrangement
which allows a member of a CUG to receive calls from outside
the CUG.
IA5 International Alphanumeric 5 character set.
IADU Integrated Antenna Distribution Unit. The IADU is the
equivalent of the Receive Matrix used on BTSs that pre-date
the M-Cell range.
IAM Initial Address Message. A message sent in the forward
direction that contains (a) address information, (b) the signaling
information required to route and connect a call to the called
line, (c) service-class information, (d) information relating to
user and network facilities, and (e) call-originator identity or
call-receiver identity.
IAS Internal Alarm System. The IAS is responsible for monitoring
all cabinet alarms at a BSS.
IC Integrated Circuit. An electronic circuit that consists of
many individual circuit elements, such as transistors,
diodes, resistors, capacitors, inductors, and other active and
passive semiconductor devices, formed on a single chip of
semiconducting material and mounted on a single piece of
substrate material.
IC Interlock Code. A code which uniquely identifies a CUG within
a network.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-31

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

IC(pref) Interlock Code of the preferential CUG.

ICB Incoming Calls Barred. An access restriction that prevents a
CUG member from receiving calls from other members of that
group.
ICC Integrated Circuit(s) Card.
ICM In-Call Modification. Function which allows the service mode
(speech, facsimile, data) to be changed during a call.
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol. An extension to the Internet
Protocol (IP) that allows for the generation of error messages,
test packets, and informational messages related to IP. The
PING command, for example, uses ICMP to test an Internet
connection.
ID, Id IDentification/IDentity/IDentifier.
IDN Integrated Digital Network. A network that uses both digital
transmission and digital switching.
IDS Interface Design Specification.
IDS Informix Dynamic Server. The OMC-R relational database
management system.
IE Information Element. The part of a message that contains
configuration or signalling information.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission. An international
standards and conformity assessment body for electrical,
electronic and related technologies.
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. A non-profit,
technical professional association.
IEI Information Element Identifier. The identifier field of the IE.
I-ETS Interim European Telecommunication Standard.
IF Intermediate Frequency. A frequency to which a carrier
frequency is shifted as an intermediate step in transmission
or reception.
IFAM Initial and Final Address Message.
IM InterModulation. The production, in a nonlinear element of a
system, of frequencies corresponding to the sum and difference
frequencies of the fundamentals and harmonics thereof that
are transmitted through the element.
IMACS Intelligent Monitor And Control System.
IMEI International Mobile station Equipment Identity. Electronic
serial number that uniquely identifies the MS as a piece or
assembly of equipment. The IMEI is sent by the MS along with
request for service. See also IMEISV.
IMEISV International Mobile station Equipment Identity and Software
Version number. The IMEISV is a 16 digit decimal number
composed of four elements:- a 6 digit Type Approval
Code; - a 2 digit Final Assembly Code; - a 6 digit Serial
Number; and - a 2 digit Software Version Number (SVN).
The first three elements comprise the IMEI. When the network
requests the IMEI from the MS, the SVN (if present) is also sent
towards the network. See also IMEI and SVN.

12-32 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

IMM IMMediate assignment message. IMMs are sent from the

network to the MS to indicate that the MS must immediately
start monitoring a specified channel.
IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity. Published mobile
number (prior to ISDN) that uniquely identifies the subscription.
It can serve as a key to derive subscriber information such as
directory number(s) from the HLR. See also MSISDN.
IN Intelligent Network. A network that allows functionality to
be distributed flexibly at a variety of nodes on and off the
network and allows the architecture to be modified to control
the services.
IN Interrogating Node. A switching node that interrogates an HLR,
to route a call for an MS to the visited MSC.
INS IN Service.
INS Intelligent Network Service. A service provided using the
capabilities of an intelligent network. See also IN.
InterAlg Interference Algorithm.
Intermittent Intermittent alarms are transient and not usually associated
with a serious fault condition. After the intermittent alarms are
displayed in the Alarm window, the operator must handle and
clear the alarm. The system will report every occurrence of an
intermittent alarm unless it is throttled. See also FMIC and OIC.
Interworking The general term used to describe the inter-operation of
networks, services, supplementary services and so on. See
also IWF.
Interval A recording period of time in which a statistic is pegged.
Interval expiry The end of an interval.
I/O Input/Output.
IOS Intelligent Optimization Service. Tool for improving the network
quality. The IOS generates reports based on performance data
from the BTS and OMC-R.
IP Initialisation Process. The IP is primarily responsible for
bringing up the site from a reset, including code loading
the site from a suitable code source. IP also provides the
CSFP functionality, allowing two BSS code load version to be
swapped very quickly, allowing the site to return to service as
soon as possible.
IP Internet Protocol. A standard protocol designed for use
in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer
communication networks. IP provides for transmitting blocks
of data called datagrams from sources to destinations,
where sources and destinations are hosts identified by
fixed-length addresses. The internet protocol also provides for
fragmentation and reassembly of long datagrams, if necessary,
for transmission through small-packet networks. See also TCP
and TCP/IP.
IPC Inter-Process Communication. Exchange of data between one
process and another, either within the same computer or over
a network.
IP, INP INtermodulation Products. Distortion. A type of spurious
emission.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-33

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

IPR Intellectual PRoperty.

IPSM Integrated Power Supply Module (-48 V).
IPX Internetwork Packet EXchange A networking protocol used by
the Novell NetWare operating systems. Like UDP/IP, IPX is a
datagram protocol used for connectionless communications.
Higher-level protocols are used for additional error recovery
services.
IR Incremental Redundancy (Hybrid Type II ARQ)
Iridium A communications system comprising a constellation of 66
low-earth-orbiting (LEO) satellites forming a mobile wireless
system allowing subscribers to place and receive calls from any
location in the world. The satellite constellation is connected
to existing terrestrial telephone systems through a number of
gateway ground-stations.
ISAM Indexed Sequential Access Method. A method for managing
the way a computer accesses records and files stored on a
hard disk. While storing data sequentially, ISAM provides direct
access to specific records through an index. This combination
results in quick data access regardless of whether records are
being accessed sequentially or randomly.
ISC International Switching Centre. The ISC routes calls to/from
other countries.
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. A digital network using
common switches and digital transmission paths to establish
connections for various services such as telephony, data telex,
and facsimile. See also B channel and D channel.
ISG Motorola Information Systems group (formerly CODEX).
ISO International Organisation for Standardization. ISO is a
world-wide federation of national standards bodies from some
130 countries, one from each country.
ISQL An Interactive Structured Query Language client application for
the database server. See also IDS.
ISS Integrated Support Server. The ISS resides on a Sun Netra
t 1125 and performs the CGF, DNS, NTP, and NFS functions
for the GSN.
IST Integrated System Test.
ISUP ISDN User Part. An upper-layer application supported by
signalling system No. 7 for connection set up and tear down.
IT Inactivity Test (Part of SCCP network connectivity).
ITC Information Transfer Capability. A GSM Bearer Capability
Element which is provided on the Dm channel to support
Terminal adaptation function to Interworking control procedures.
ITU International Telecommunication Union. An intergovernmental
organization through which public and private organizations
develop telecommunications. It is responsible for adopting
international treaties, regulations and standards governing
telecommunications.
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications
Standardization Sector. The standardization functions were
formerly performed by CCITT, a group within the ITU.

12-34 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

IWF InterWorking Function. A network functional entity which

provides network interworking, service interworking,
supplementary service interworking or signalling interworking.
It may be a part of one or more logical or physical entities in a
GSM PLMN.
IWMSC InterWorking MSC. MSC that is used to deliver data to/from
SGSN.
IWU InterWorking Unit. Unit where the digital to analogue (and visa
versa) conversion takes place within the digital GSM network.

k - KW

k kilo (103).
k Windows size.
K Constraint length of the convolutional code.
KAIO Kernel Asynchronous Input/Output. Part of the OMC-R
relational database management system.
kb, kbit kilo-bit.
kbit/s, kbps kilo-bits per second.
kbyte kilobyte. 210 bytes = 1024 bytes
Kc Ciphering key. A sequence of symbols that controls the
operation of encipherment and decipherment.
kHz kilo-Hertz.
Ki Individual subscriber authentication Key. Part of the
authentication process of the AUC.
KIO A class of processor.
KPI Key Performance Indicator.
KSW Kiloport SWitch board. TDM timeslot interchanger to connect
calls. Part of the BSS.
KSWX KSW Expander half size board. Fibre optic distribution of TDM
bus. Part of the BSS.
kW kilo-Watt.

L1 - LV

L1 Layer 1 (of a communications protocol).

L2 Layer 2 (of a communications protocol).
L2ML Layer 2 Management Link. L2ML is used for transferring layer
2 management messages to TRX or BCF. One link per TRX
and BCF.
L2R Layer 2 Relay function. A function of an MS and IWF that
adapts a user’s known layer 2 protocol LAPB onto RLP for
transmission between the MT and IWF.
L2R BOP L2R Bit Orientated Protocol.
L2R COP L2R Character Orientated Protocol.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-35

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

L3 Layer 3 (of a communications protocol).

LA Link Adaptation.
LA Location Area. An area in which an MS may move freely
without updating the location register. An LA may comprise one
or several base station areas.
LAC Location Area Code. The LAC is part of the LAI. It is an
operator defined code identifying the location area.
LAI Location Area Identity. The information indicating the location
area in which a cell is located. The LAI data on the SIM is
continuously updated to reflect the current location of the
subscriber.
LAN Local Area Network. A data communications system that (a)
lies within a limited spatial area, (b) has a specific user group,
(c) has a specific topology, and (d) is not a public switched
telecommunications network, but may be connected to one.
LANX LAN Extender half size board. Fibre optic distribution of LAN
to/from other cabinets. Part of BSS, etc.
LAPB Link Access Protocol Balanced. The balanced-mode, enhanced
version of HDLC. Used in X.25 packet-switching networks.
LAPD Link Access Protocol D-channel (Data). A protocol that
operates at the data link layer (layer 2) of the OSI architecture.
LAPD is used to convey information between layer 3 entities
across the frame relay network. The D-channel carries
signalling information for circuit switching.
LAPDm Link Access Protocol on the Dm channel. A link access
procedure (layer 2) on the CCH for the digital mobile
communications system.
Layer 1 See OSI-RM and Physical Layer.
Layer 2 See OSI-RM and Data Link Layer.
Layer 3 See OSI-RM and Network Layer.
Layer 4 See OSI-RM and Transport Layer.
Layer 5 See OSI-RM and Session Layer.
Layer 6 See OSI-RM and Presentation Layer.
Layer 7 See OSI-RM and Application Layer.
LC Inductor Capacitor. A type of filter.
LCF Link Control Function. LCF GPROC controls various links in
and out of the BSC. Such links include MTL, XBL, OMF and
RSL. See also LCP.
LCN Local Communications Network. A communication network
within a TMN that supports data communication functions
(DCFs) normally at specified reference points q1 and q2. LCNs
range from the simple to the complex. LCN examples include
point-to-point connections and networks based on star and
bus topologies.
LCP Link Control Processor. An LCP is a GPROC or PCMCIA
board device which supplies the LCF. Once the LCF has been
equipped, and assuming GPROCs have been equipped,
processors are allocated by the software.
LCS Location Services

12-36 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

LE Local Exchange.
LED Light Emitting Diode. A type of diode that emits light when
current passes through it. Depending on the material used the
colour can be visible or infrared.
LF Line Feed. A code that moves the cursor on a display screen
down one line. In the ASCII character set, a line feed has a
decimal value of 10. On printers, a line feed advances the
paper one line.
LI Length Indicator. Delimits LLC PDUs within the RLC data
block, when an LLC PDU boundary occurs in the block.
LI Line Identity. The LI is made up of a number of information
units: the subscriber’s national ISDN/MSISDN number; the
country code; optionally, subaddress information. In a full
ISDN environment, the line identity includes all of the address
information necessary to unambiguously identify a subscriber.
The calling line identity is the line identity of the calling party.
The connected line identity is the line identity of the connected
party.
LLC Logical Link Control.
LLC Lower Layer Compatibility. The LLC can carry information
defining the lower layer characteristics of the terminal.
Lm Traffic channel with capacity lower than a Bm.
LMP LAN Monitor Process. Each GPROC which is connected to a
LAN has an LMP, which detects faults on the LAN. LAN alarms
are generated by the GPROC.
LMS Least Mean Squares. Parameters determined by minimizing
the sum of squares of the deviations.
LMSI Local Mobile Station Identity. A unique identity temporarily
allocated to visiting mobile subscribers in order to speed up
the search for subscriber data in the VLR, when the MSRN
allocation is done on a per cell basis.
LMT Local Maintenance Terminal. Diagnostic tool, typically an IBM
compatible PC.
LNA Low Noise Amplifier. An amplifier with low noise characteristics.
LND Last Number Dialled.
Location area An area in which a mobile station may move freely without
updating the location register. A location area may comprise
one or several base station areas.
LPC Linear Predictive Coding. A method of digitally encoding analog
signals. It uses a single-level or multi-level sampling system in
which the value of the signal at each sample time is predicted
to be a linear function of the past values of the quantified signal.
LPLMN Local PLMN.
LQC Link Quality Control.
LR Location Register. The GSM functional unit where MS location
information is stored. The HLR and VLR are location registers.
LSSU Link Stations Signalling Unit (Part of MTP transport system).

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-37

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

LSTR Listener Side Tone Rating. A rating, expressed in dB, based

on how a listener will perceive the background noise picked
up by the microphone.
LTA Long Term Average. The value required in a BTS’s GCLK
frequency register to produce a 16.384 MHz clock.
LTE Local Terminal Emulator.
LTP Long Term Predictive.
LTU Line Terminating Unit.
LU Local Units.
LU Location Update. A location update is initiated by the MS when
it detects that it has entered a new location area.
LV Length and Value.

M - MUX

M Mandatory.
M Mega (106).
M-Cell Motorola Cell.
M&TS Maintenance and TroubleShooting. Functional area of Network
Management software which (1) collects and displays alarms,
(2) collects and displays Software/Hardware errors, and (3)
activates test diagnostics at the NEs (OMC).
MA Mobile Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated to
an MS for use in its frequency hopping sequence.
MAC Medium Access Control. MAC includes the functions related
to the management of the common transmission resources.
These include the packet data physical channels and their
radio link connections. Two Medium Access Control modes are
supported in GSR5, dynamic allocation and fixed allocation.
MACN Mobile Allocation Channel Number. See also MA.
Macrocell A cell in which the base station antenna is generally mounted
away from buildings or above rooftop level.
MAF Mobile Additional Function.
MAH Mobile Access Hunting supplementary service. An automatic
service which searches for the first available mobile user out of
a defined group.
MAI Mobile Allocation Index.
MAIDT Mean Accumulated Intrinsic Down Time.
MAINT MAINTenance.
MAIO Mobile Allocation Index Offset. The offset of the mobile hopping
sequence from the reference hopping sequence of the cell.
MAP Mobile Application Part (part of SS7 standard). The
inter-networking signalling between MSCs and LRs and EIRs.
MAPP Mobile Application Part Processor.
MB, Mbyte Megabyte. 220 bytes = 1,048,576 bytes = 1024 kilobytes.
Mbit/s Megabits per second.

12-38 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

MCAP Motorola Cellular Advanced Processor. The MCAP Bus is the

inter-GPROC communications channel in a BSC. Each card
cage in a BSC needs at least one GPROC designated as an
MCAP Server.
MCC Mobile Country Code. The first three digits of the IMSI, used
to identify the country.
MCDF Motorola Customer Data Format used by DataGen for simple
data entry and retrieval.
MCI Malicious Call Identification supplementary service. This
feature is supported by a malicious call trace function by
printing the report at the terminating MSC when the mobile
subscriber initiates a malicious call trace request.
MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme.
MCSC Motorola Customer Support Centre.
MCU Main Control Unit for M-Cell2/6. Also referred to as the Micro
Control Unit in software.
MCUF Main Control Unit, with dual FMUX. (Used in M-Cellhorizon).
MCU-m Main Control Unit for M-Cellmicro sites (M-Cellm). Also referred
to as the Micro Control Unit in software.
MCUm The software subtype representation of the Field Replaceable
Unit (FRU) for the MCU-m.
MD Mediation Device. The MD (which handles the Q3 interface)
allows the OSI Processor to communicate between the
Network Management Centre (NMC) and OMC-R for network
configuration, events and alarms.
MDL mobile Management entity - Data Link layer.
ME Maintenance Entity (GSM Rec. 12.00).
ME Mobile Equipment. Equipment intended to access a set of GSM
PLMN and/or DCS telecommunication services, but which does
not contain subscriber related information. Services may be
accessed while the equipment, capable of surface movement
within the GSM system area, is in motion or during halts at
unspecified points.
MEF Maintenance Entity Function (GSM Rec. 12.00). A function
which possesses the capability to detect elementary anomalies
and convey them to the supervision process.
MF MultiFrame. In PCM systems, a set of consecutive frames in
which the position of each frame can be identified by reference
to a multiframe alignment signal.
MF Multi-Frequency (tone signalling type). See DTMF.
MF MultiFunction block.
MGMT, mgmt Management.
MGR Manager.
MHS Message Handling System. The family of services and
protocols that provides the functions for global electronic-mail
transfer among local mail systems.
MHS Mobile Handling Service.
MHz Mega-Hertz (106).

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-39

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

MI Maintenance Information.
MIB Management Information Base. A Motorola OMC-R database.
There is a CM MIB and an EM MIB.
MIC Mobile Interface Controller.
Microcell A cell in which the base station antenna is generally mounted
below rooftop level. Radio wave propagation is by diffraction
and scattering around buildings, the main propagation is within
street canyons.
min minute(s).
µs micro-second (10-6).
µBCU Micro Base Control Unit. The µBCU is the Macro/Microcell
implementation of a BTS site controller.
MIT Management Information Tree. A file on the Motorola OMC-R.
The MIT file effectively monitors data on every device and
every parameter of each device that is in the current versions
of software on the OMC-R. The data is stored as a text file
on the OMC-R. The MIT file also contains the hierarchical
relationships between the network devices.
MM Man Machine. See MMI.
MM Mobility Management. MM functions include authorization,
location updating, IMSI attach/detach, periodic registration, ID
confidentiality, paging, handover, etc.
MME Mobile Management Entity.
MMF Middle Man Funnel process.
MMI Man Machine Interface. The method by which the user
interfaces with the software to request a function or change
parameters. The MMI may run on a terminal at the OMC, or
an LMT. The MMI is used to display alarm reports, retrieve
device status, take modules out of service and put modules
into service.
MMI client A machine configured to use the OMC-R software from an MMI
server.
MMI processor MMI client/MMI server.
MMI server A computer which has its own local copy of the OMC-R
software. It can run the OMC-R software for MMI clients to
mount.
MML Man Machine Language. The tool of MMI.
MMS Multiple Serial Interface Link. (see also 2Mbit/s link)
MNC Mobile Network Code. The fourth, fifth and optionally sixth
digits of the IMSI, used to identify the network.
MNT MaiNTenance.
Mobis Motorola Signalling Link between the BSC and BTS.
MO Mobile Originated.
MO/PP Mobile Originated Point-to-Point messages. Transmission of
a SMS from a mobile to a message handling system. The
maximum length of the message is 160 characters. The
message can be sent whether or not the MS is engaged in
a call.

12-40 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

MOMAP Motorola OMAP.

MoU Memorandum of Understanding. Commercial term. An MoU
usually sets out the broad parameters of an understanding as
well as the general responsibilities and obligations of each
party in a proposed venture. It has little legal significance
except to indicate the parties’ commitments and acts as an aid
to interpreting the parties’ intentions. There are various types
of MOUs: compliance MOUs help ensure that all Motorola
units comply with applicable laws and regulations; intellectual
property MOUs deal with copyright, trademark, and patent
rights; and business arrangement MOUs relate to the terms
and conditions of a product or service transfer.
MPC Multi Personal Computer (was part of the OMC).
MPH (mobile) Management (entity) - PHysical (layer) [primitive].
MPROC Master Processor
MPTY MultiParTY (Multi ParTY) supplementary service. MPTY
provides a mobile subscriber with the ability to have a
multi-connection call, i.e. a simultaneous communication with
more than one party.
MPX MultiPleXed.
MRC Micro Radio Control Unit.
MRN Mobile Roaming Number.
MRP Mouth Reference Point. Facility for assessing handset and
headset acoustic responses.
MS Mobile Station. The GSM subscriber unit. A subscriber
handset, either mobile or portable, or other subscriber
equipment, such as facsimile machines, etc.
MSC Mobile-services Switching Centre, Mobile Switching Centre.
The MSC handles the call set up procedures and controls the
location registration and handover procedures for all except
inter-BTS, inter-cell and intra-cell handovers. MSC controlled
inter-BTS handovers can be set as an option at the switch.
MSCM Mobile Station Class Mark.
MSCU Mobile Station Control Unit.
msec millisecond (.001 second).
MSI Multiple Serial Interface board. Intelligent interface to two 2
Mbit/s digital links. See 2 Mbit/s link and DS-2. Part of BSS.
MSIN Mobile Station Identification Number. The part of the IMSI
identifying the mobile station within its home network.
MSISDN Mobile Station International ISDN Number. Published mobile
number (see also IMSI). Uniquely defines the mobile station as
an ISDN terminal. It consists of three parts: the Country Code
(CC), the National Destination Code (NDC) and the Subscriber
Number (SN).
MSRN Mobile Station Roaming Number. A number assigned by the
MSC to service and track a visiting subscriber.
MSU Message Signal Unit (Part of MTP transport system). A signal
unit containing a service information octet and a signalling
information field which is retransmitted by the signalling link
control, if it is received in error.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-41

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

MT Mobile Terminated. Describes a call or short message destined

for an MS.
MT (0, 1, 2) Mobile Termination. The part of the MS which terminates the
radio transmission to and from the network and adapts terminal
equipment (TE) capabilities to those of the radio transmission.
MT0 is mobile termination with no support for terminal, MT1
is mobile termination with support for an S-type interface and
MT2 is mobile termination with support for an R-type interface.
MTBE Mean Time Between Exceptions.
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures. An indicator of expected system
reliability calculated on a statistical basis from the known failure
rates of various components of the system. MTBF is usually
expressed in hours.
MTL Message Transfer Link. The MTL is the 64 kbit/s PCM timeslot
that is used to convey the SS7 signalling information on the A
interface between the MSC and the BSC.
MTM Mobile-To-Mobile (call).
MTP Message Transfer Part. The part of a common-channel
signaling system that transfers signal messages and performs
associated functions, such as error control and signaling link
security.
MT/PP Mobile Terminated Point-to-Point messages. Transmission of a
short message from a message handling system to a mobile.
The maximum length of the message is 160 characters. The
message can be received whether or not the MS is engaged in
a call.
MTTR Mean Time To Repair. The total corrective maintenance time
divided by the total number of corrective maintenance actions
during a given period of time.
Multiframe Two types of multiframe are defined in the system: a 26-frame
multiframe with a period of 120 ms and a 51-frame multiframe
with a period of 3060/13 ms.
MU Mark Up.
MUMS Multi User Mobile Station.
MUX Multiplexer. A device that combines multiple inputs into an
aggregate signal to be transported via a single transmission
channel.

NACK - nW

NACK, Nack No Acknowledgement

N/W Network.
NB Normal Burst (see Normal burst).
NBIN A parameter in the frequency hopping sequence generation
algorithm.
NCC Network Colour Code. The NCC and the BCC are part of the
BSIC. The NCC comprises three bits in the range 000 to 111.
It is the same as the PLMN Colour Code. See also NCC and
BSIC.

12-42 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

NCELL Neighbouring (of current serving) Cell.

NCH Notification CHannel. Part of the downlink element of the
CCCH reserved for voice group and/or voice broad-cast calls
and notification messages.
NCRM Network Cell Reselection Manager.
ND No Duplicates. A database column attribute meaning the
column contains unique values (used only with indexed
columns).
NDC National Destination Code. Part of the MSISDN. An NDC is
allocated to each GSM PLMN.
NDUB Network Determined User Busy. An NDUB condition occurs
when a call is about to be offered and the maximum number of
total calls for the channel has been reached. In practice, the
total number of calls could be three: one for the basic call, one
for a held call and one for call waiting.
NE Network Element (Network Entity). A piece of
telecommunications equipment that provides support or
services to the user.
NEF Network Element Function block. A functional block that
communicates with a TMN for the purpose of being monitored,
or controlled, or both.
NET Norme Européennes de Telecommunications.
NetPlan An RF planning tool, NetPlan can import data from the OMC
and use it to carry out a network frequency replan.
Network Layer See OSI RM. The Network Layer responds to service requests
from the Transport Layer and issues service requests to the
Data Link Layer. It provides the functional and procedural
means of transferring variable length data sequences from
a source to a destination via one or more networks while
maintaining the quality of service requested by the Transport
Layer. The Network Layer performs network routing, flow
control, segmentation/desegmentation, and error control
functions.
NF Network Function.
NFS Network File System. A file system that is distributed over a
computer network. Also, a file system, on a single computer,
that contains the low-level networking files for an entire network.
NHA Network Health Analyst. The NHA is an optional feature. It
detects problems by monitoring network statistics and events
via the OMC-R. The NHA analyses the event history, statistics
and network configuration data to try to determine the cause of
the detected problems.
NIB Network Interface Board.
NIC Network Interface Card. A network interface device in the form
of a circuit card that provides network access.
NIC Network Independent Clocking.
NIS Network Information Service. It allows centralised control of
network information for example hostnames, IP addresses and
passwords.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-43

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

N-ISDN Narrowband Integrated Services Digital Network: Services

include basic rate interface (2B+D or BRI) and primary rate
interface (30B+D - Europe and 23B+D - North America or PRI).
Supports narrowband speeds at/or below 1.5 Mbps.
NIU Network Interface Unit. A device that performs interface
functions, such as code conversion, protocol conversion, and
buffering, required for communications to and from a network.
NIU-m Network Interface Unit, micro. M-Cellmicro MSI.
NL See Network Layer.
NLK Network LinK processor(s).
Nm Newton metres.
NM Network Management (manager). NM is all activities which
control, monitor and record the use and the performance of
resources of a telecommunications network in order to provide
telecommunication services to customers/users at a certain
level of quality.
NMASE Network Management Application Service Element.
NMC Network Management Centre. The NMC node of the GSM
TMN provides global and centralised GSM PLMN monitoring
and control, by being at the top of the TMN hierarchy and linked
to subordinate OMC nodes.
NMSI National Mobile Station Identification number, or, National
Mobile Subscriber Identity. The NMSI consists of the MNC and
the MSIN.
NMT Nordic Mobile Telephone system. NMT produced the world’s
first automatic international mobile telephone system.
NN No Nulls. A database column attribute meaning the column
must contain a value in all rows.
Normal burst A period of modulated carrier less than a timeslot.
NPI Number Plan Identifier.
NRZ Non Return to Zero. A code in which ones are represented by
one significant condition and zeros are represented by another,
with no neutral or rest condition.
NSAP Network Service Access Point. An NSAP is a registration made
by an application which specifies its desired listening criteria.
The registration is limited to a particular CPU and port number.
Criteria can include: DNICs, national numbers, subaddress
ranges, protocol-ids, and extended addresses.
NSP Network Service Provider. A national or regional company
that owns or maintains a portion of the network and resells
connectivity.
NSS Network Status Summary. A feature of the OMC-R MMI,
which provides different network maps giving visual indication
of the network configuration and performance, and how the
different network management functions are implemented by
the OMC-R.
NST Network Service Test(er). A PCU process that periodically tests
all alive NS-VCs on a PICP board.
NS-VC Network Service - Virtual Circuit.

12-44 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

NT Network Termination. Network equipment that provides

functions necessary for network operation of ISDN access
protocols.
NT Non Transparent.
NTAAB NTRAC Type Approvals Advisory Board. Committee engaged
in harmonisation type approval of telecom terminals in Europe.
NTP Network Time Protocol. A protocol built on top of TCP/IP that
assures accurate local timekeeping with reference to radio,
atomic or other clocks located on the Internet. This protocol is
capable of synchronizing distributed clocks within milliseconds
over long time periods.
Numbers # - The symbol used for number.2 Mbit/s link - As used in
this manual set, the term applies to the European 4-wire
2.048 Mbit/s digital line or link which can carry 30 A-law PCM
channels or 120 16 kbit/s GSM channels.4GL - 4th Generation
Language. Closer to human languages than typical high-level
programming languages. most 4GLs are used to access
databases.
NUA Network User Access.
NUI Network User Identification.
NUP National User Part. (part of SS7).
NV NonVolatile.
NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory. Static random access
memory which is made into non-volatile storage either by
having a battery permanently connected, or, by saving its
contents to EEPROM before turning the power off and
reloading it when power is restored.
nW Nano-Watt (10-9).

O - Overlap

O Optional.
OA Outgoing Access supplementary service. An arrangement
which allows a member of a CUG to place calls outside the
CUG.
OA&M Operation, Administration, & Management.
OAMP Operation, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning.
O&M Operations and Maintenance.
OASCU Off-Air-Call-Set-Up. The procedure in which a
telecommunication connection is being established whilst the
RF link between the MS and the BTS is not occupied.
OCB Outgoing Calls Barred within the CUG supplementary service.
An access restriction that prevents a CUG member from
placing calls to other members of that group.
OCXO Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator. High stability clock source
used for frequency synchronization.
OD Optional for operators to implement for their aim.
OFL % OverFlow.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-45

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

offline IDS shutdown state.

online IDS normal operating state.
OIC Operator Initiated Clear. An alarm type. OIC alarms must be
cleared by the OMC-R operator after the fault condition that
caused the alarm is resolved. See also FMIC and Intermittent.
OLM Off_Line MIB. A Motorola DataGen database, used to modify
and carry out Radio Frequency planning on multiple BSS
binary files.
OLR Overall Loudness Rating.
OMAP Operations and Maintenance Application Part (part of SS7
standard) (was OAMP).
OMC Operations and Maintenance Centre. The OMC node of the
GSM TMN provides dynamic O&M monitoring and control of
the PLMN nodes operating in the geographical area controlled
by the specific OMC.
OMC-G Operations and Maintenance Centre - Gateway Part. (Iridium)
OMC-G Operations and Maintenance Centre - GPRS Part.
OMC-R Operations and Maintenance Centre - Radio Part.
OMC-S Operations and Maintenance Centre - Switch Part.
OMF Operations and Maintenance Function (at BSC).
OML Operations and Maintenance Link. The OML provides
communication between an OMC-R and a BSC or RXCDR for
transferring network management (O&M) data.
OMP Operation and Maintenance Processor. Part of the BSC.
OMS Operation and Maintenance System (BSC-OMC).
OMSS Operation and Maintenance SubSystem.
OOS Out Of Service. Identifies a physical state. The OOS state
indicates the physical device is out of service. This state is
reserved for physical communication links. Also, identifies a
telephony state. The OOS state is used by the BTS device
software to indicate that the BTS is completely out of service.
OPC Originating Point Code. A part of the label in a signalling
message that uniquely identifies, in a signalling network, the
(signalling) origination point of the message.
ORAC Olympus Radio Architecture Chipset.
OS Operating System. The fundamental program running on a
computer which controls all operations.
OSI Open Systems Interconnection. The logical structure for
communications networks standardized by the ISO. The
standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate
and exchange information with any other OSI-compliant
system.

12-46 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

OSI RM OSI Reference Model. An abstract description of the digital

communications between application processes running in
distinct systems. The model employs a hierarchical structure of
seven layers. Each layer performs value-added service at the
request of the adjacent higher layer and, in turn, requests more
basic services from the adjacent lower layer:Layer 1 - Physical
Layer, Layer 2 - Data Link Layer, Layer 3 - Network Layer,
Layer 4 - Transport Layer, Layer 5 - Session Layer, Layer 6 -
Presentation Layer, Layer 7 - Application Layer.
OSF Operation Systems Function block.
OSF/MOTIF Open Software Foundation Motif. The basis of the GUI used
for the Motorola OMC-R MMI.
OSS Operator Services System.
Overlap Overlap sending means that digits are sent from one system to
another as soon as they are received by the sending system. A
system using ~ will not wait until it has received all digits of a
call before it starts to send the digits to the next system. This
is the opposite of en bloc sending where all digits for a given
call are sent at one time. See en bloc.

PA - PXPDN

P1, P2, P3 Puncturing Schemes 1, 2, and 3.

PA Power Amplifier.
PAB Power Alarm Board. Part of the BSS.
PABX Private Automatic Branch eXchange. A private automatic
telephone exchange that allows calls within the exchange and
also calls to and from the public telephone network.
PACCH Packet Associated Control Channel.
Packet A sequence of binary digits, including data and control signals,
that is transmitted and switched as a composite whole.
Packet Switching The process of routing and transferring data by means of
addressed packets so that a channel is occupied during the
transmission of the packet only, and upon completion of the
transmission the channel is made available for the transfer of
other traffic.
PAD Packet Assembler/Disassembler facility. A hardware device
that allows a data terminal that is not set up for packet switching
to use a packet switching network. It assembles data into
packets for transmission, and disassembles the packets on
arrival.
Paging The procedure by which a GSM PLMN fixed infrastructure
attempts to reach an MS within its location area, before any
other network-initiated procedure can take place.
PATH CEPT 2 Mbit/s route through the BSS network.
PBCCH Packet Braodcast Control channel.
PBUS Processor Bus.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-47

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

PBX Private Branch eXchange. In the general use of the term, PBX
is a synonym for PABX. However, a PBX operates with only a
manual switchboard; a private automatic exchange (PAX) does
not have a switchboard, a private automatic branch exchange
(PABX) may or may not have a switchboard.
PC Personal Computer. A general-purpose single-user
microcomputer designed to be operated by one person at a
time.
pCA PCU Central Authority. One pCA software process is located at
every PCU. The CA is in control of the PCU. It is resident on
the master DPROC (MPROC) only, and maintains a list of the
status of every device and every software process at the site.
PCCCH Packet Common Control Channel.
PCH Paging CHannel. A common access RF channel providing
point-to-multipoint unidirectional signaling downlink. Provides
simultaneous transmission to all MSs over a wide paging area.
PCHN Paging Channel Network.
PCHN Physical Channel. The physical channel is the medium over
which the information is carried. In the case of GSM radio
communications this would be the Air Interface. Each RF
carrier consists of eight physical channels (or timeslots) used
for MS communications. In the case of a terrestrial interface
the physical channel would be cable. See also Physical Layer.
PCI Packet Control Interface.
PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect. A standard for connecting
peripherals to a personal computer, PCI is a 64-bit bus, though
it is usually implemented as a 32-bit bus.
PCM Pulse Code Modulation. Modulation in which a signal is
sampled, and the magnitude (with respect to a fixed reference)
of each sample is quantized and converted by coding to a
digital signal. Provides undistorted transmission, even in the
presence of noise. See also 2 Mbit/s link, which is the physical
bearer of PCM.
pCM PCU Configuration Management. pCM is a GWM process. It
distributes all database changes performed at the BSC to the
PCU boards.
PCN Personal Communications Network. Any network supporting
PCS, but in particular DCS1800.
PCR Preventative Cyclic Retransmission. A form of error correction
suitable for use on links with long transmission delays, such
as satellite links.
PCS The U.
S. Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) term used to describe a set of digital
cellular technologies being deployed in the
U.S. PCS works over GSM, CDMA
(also called IS-95), and North American TDMA (also called
IS-136) air interfaces.

12-48 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

PCS System Personal Communications Services System. In PCS, a

collection of facilities that provides some combination of
personal mobility, terminal mobility, and service profile
management. Note: As used here, "facilities" includes
hardware, software, and network components such as
transmission facilities, switching facilities, signalling facilities,
and databases.
PCS1900 A cellular phone network using the higher frequency
range allocated in countries such as the USA. It operates
on the frequency range, 1850 - 1910 MHz (receive) and
1930 - 1990 MHz (transmit).
PCU Packet Control Unit. A BSS component that provides GPRS
with packet scheduling over the air interface with the MS, and
packet segmentization and packetization across the Frame
Relay link with the SGSN.
PCU Picocell Control unit. Part of M-Cellaccess.
pd Potential difference. Voltage.
PD Protocol Discriminator field. The first octet of the packet header
that identifies the protocol used to transport the frame.
PD Public Data. See PDN.
PDB Power Distribution Board.
PDCH Packet Data Channel. PDCH carries a combination of PBCCH
and PDTCH logical channels.
PDF Power Distribution Frame (MSC/LR).
PDN Public Data Network. A network established and operated by
a telecommunications administration, or a recognized private
operating agency, for the specific purpose of providing data
transmission services for the public.
PDP Packet Data Protocol.
PDTCH Packet Data Traffic Channels
PDU Power Distribution Unit. The PDU consists consisting of the
Alarm Interface Board (AIB) and the Power Distribution Board
(PDB).
PDU Protected Data Unit.
PDU Protocol Data Unit. A term used in TCP/IP to refer to a unit of
data, headers, and trailers at any layer in a network.
PEDC Pan-European Digital Cellular network. The GSM network in
Europe.
Peg A single incremental action modifying the value of a statistic.
Also, A number indicating the use of a device or resource.
Each time the device or resource is used the peg count is
incremented.
Pegging Modifying a statistical value.
pFCP PCU Fault Collection Process. See pFTP.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-49

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

pFTP PCU Fault Transaction Process. The pFTP resides on the PSP
as part of the GWM Functional Unit process. All alarms at the
PCU are reported to pFTP. All DPROCs and the MPROC have
a local pFCP to handle Software Fault Management indications
(SWFMs). The pFTP forwards alarms to the Agent at the BSC
and generates messages to pCA for device transitions as
needed, based on faults reported.
PGSM Primary GSM. PGSM operates on the standard GSM frequency
range, 890 - 915 MHz (receive) and 935 - 960 MHz (transmit).
PH Packet Handler. A packet handler assembles and disassembles
packets.
PH PHysical (layer). See Physical Layer.
PHI Packet Handler Interface.
Physical Layer See OSI-RM. The Physical Layer is the lowest of seven
hierarchical layers. It performs services requested by the Data
Link Layer. The major functions and services of the layer
are: (a) establishment and termination of a connection to a
communications medium; (b) participation in the process of
sharing communication resources among multiple users; and,
(c) conversion between the representation of digital data in
user equipment and the corresponding signals transmitted over
a communications channel.
PI Presentation Indicator. The PI forms part of the calling name
information. Depending on database settings, the PI may
prevent the called party from seeing the identity of the calling
party.
PIA Packet Immediate Assignment.
Picocell A cell site where the base station antenna is mounted within
a building.
PICP Packet Interface Control Processor. A PCU hardware
component, the PICP is a DPROC board used for network
interfacing functions such as SGSN and BSC.
PICS Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. A statement
made by the supplier of an implementation or system claimed
to conform to a given specification, stating which capabilities
have been implemented.
PID Process IDentifier/Process ID.
PIM PCM Interface Module (MSC).
PIN Personal Identification Number. A password, typically four
digits entered through a telephone keypad.
PIN Problem Identification Number.
PIX Parallel Interface Extender half size board. Customer alarm
interface, part of the BSS. The PIX board provides a means of
wiring alarms external to the BSS, BSC, or BTS into the base
equipment.
PIXT or PIXIT Protocol Implementation eXtra information for Testing.
A statement made by a supplier or implementor of an
implementation under test (IUT) which contains information
about the IUT and its testing environment which will enable a
test laboratory to run an appropriate test suite against the IUT.

12-50 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

PK Primary Key. A database column attribute, the primary key is a

not-null, non-duplicate index.
PL See Presentation Layer.
Plaintext Unciphered data.
PlaNET Frequency planning tool.
PLL Phase Lock Loop (refers to phase locking the GCLK in the
BTS). PLL is a mechanism whereby timing information is
transferred within a data stream and the receiver derives the
signal element timing by locking its local clock source to the
received timing information.
PLMN Public Land Mobile Network. The mobile communications
network.
PM Performance Management. An OMC application. PM enables
the user to produce reports specific to the performance of the
network.
PMA Prompt Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; immediate
action is necessary. See also DMA.
PMC PCI Mezzanine Card.
PMR Packet Management Report.
PMS Pseudo MMS.
PM-UI Performance Management User Interface.
PMUX PCM MUltipleXer.
PN Permanent Nucleus group of the GSM committee.
PNE Présentation des Normes Européennes. Presentation rules
of European Standards.
POI Point of Interconnection. A point at which the cellular network
is connected to the PSTN. A cellular system may have multiple
POIs.
POTS Plain Old Telephone Service. Basic telephone service without
special features such as call waiting, call forwarding, etc.
pp, p-p Peak-to-peak.
PP Point-to-Point.
ppb Parts per billion.
PPB PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) to PCI Bridge board.
The PPB allows an MPROC to be linked to a separate bus.
The PPB and MPROC are paired boards.
PPE Primitive Procedure Entity.
ppm Parts per million (x 10-6).
Pref CUG Preferential CUG. A Pref CUG, which can be specified for each
basic service group, is the nominated default CUG to be used
when no explicit CUG index is received by the network.
Presentation Layer See OSI RM. The Presentation Layer responds to service
requests from the Application Layer and issues service
requests to the Session Layer. It relieves the Application
Layer of concern regarding syntactical differences in data
representation within the end-user systems.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-51

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

Primary Cell A cell which is already optimized in the network and has a
co-located neighbour whose cell boundary follows the boundary
of the said cell. The primary cell has a preferred band equal to
the frequency type of the coincident cell.
PRM Packet Resource Manager. The PRM is a PRP process. It
performs all RLC/MAC functions and realises UL/DL power
control and timing advance.
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory. A storage device that, after
being written to once, becomes a read-only memory.
PRP Packet Resource Process(or). A PCU hardware component,
the PRP is a DPROC board which manages the packet
resources at the PCU and is the processor where all of the
radio related processing occurs. GPRS channels are routed to
PRPs which perform the RLC/MAC processing, air interface
scheduling, and frame synchronization of the channels.
Ps Location probability. Location probability is a quality criterion
for cell coverage. Due to shadowing and fading a cell edge is
defined by adding margins so that the minimum service quality
is fulfilled with a certain probability.
PS Puncturing Scheme.
PSA Periodic Supervision of Accessibility. PSA is a fault
management function. It periodically sends messages to
BSSs requesting information on their current state. This
verifies whether the BSSs are operational or not. If a BSS fails
to respond to a PSA request for its status, the OMC-R will
generate an alarm for that BSS.
PSI Packet System Information.
PSAP Presentation Services Access Point.
pSAP PCU System Audit Process. pSAP is a GWM process. It
periodically monitors the soft devices to maintain the reliability
of the system.
PSM Power Supply Module.
pSM PCU Switch Manager. The pSM resides on the PSP as part of
the GWM Functional Unit process. The pSM maintains data
paths within the PCU and communicates with the BSC.
PSP PCU System Processor board. Part of GPRS.
PSPDN Packet Switched Public Data Network. See Packet Switching
and PDN.
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network. The domestic land
line telecommunications network. It is usually accessed by
telephones, key telephone systems, private branch exchange
trunks, and data arrangements.
PSU Power Supply Unit.
PSW Pure Sine Wave.
PTACH Packet Timing Advance Control Channel
PTO Public Telecommunications Operator.
PTR Packet Timeslot Reconfiguration.
PUA Packet Uplink Assignment.

12-52 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

PUCT Price per Unit Currency Table. The PUCT is the value of the
Home unit in a currency chosen by the subscriber. The PUCT
is stored in the SIM. The value of the PUCT can be set by
the subscriber and may exceed the value published by the
HPLMN. The PUCT value does not have any impact on the
charges raised by the HPLMN.
PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit. Also, in ATM terminology,
Permanent Virtual Connection. A virtual circuit that is
permanently established, saving the time associated with circuit
establishment and tear-down. See also SVC.
PW Pass Word.
PWR Power.
PXPDN Private eXchange Public Data Network. See also PDN.

QA- Quiesent mode

QA Q (Interface) - Adapter. TMN interface adapter used to

communicate with non-TMN compatible devices and objects.
Used to connect MEs and SEs to TMN (GSM Rec. 12.00).
Q3 Interface between NMC and GSM network.
Q-adapter See QA.
QAF Q-Adapter Function.
QEI Quad European Interface. Interfaces four 2 Mbit/s circuits to
TDM switch highway. See MSI.
QIC Quarter Inch Cartridge (Data storage format).
QoS Quality Of Service. An alarm category which indicates that a
failure is degrading service.
Queue Data structure in which data or messages are temporarily
stored until they are retrieved by a software process. Also a
series of calls waiting for service. See also FIFO.
Quiescent mode IDS intermediate state before shutdown.

R - RXU

R Value of reduction of the MS transmitted RF power relative

to the maximum allowed output power of the highest power
class of MS (A).
RA RAndom mode request information field.
RA Radio Access.
RA Routing Area.
RA250 Rural Area with the MS travelling at 250 kph. Dynamic model
against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be
measured. See also TU3, TU50, HT100 and EQ50.
RAB Random Access Burst. Data sent on the RACH.
RACCH Random Access Control CHannel. A GSM common control
channel used to originate a call or respond to a page.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-53

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

RACH Random Access CHannel. The RACH is used by the mobile

station to request access to the network. See also RAB.
Radio Frequency A term applied to the transmission of electromagnetically
radiated information from one point to another, usually using air
or vacuum as the transmission medium. An electromagnetic
wave frequency intermediate between audio frequencies and
infrared frequencies used in radio and television transmission.
RAM Random Access Memory. A read/write, nonsequential-access
memory in which information can be stored, retrieved and
modified. This type of memory is generally volatile (i.e., its
contents are lost if power is removed).
RAND RANDom number (used for authentication). The RAND is sent
by the SGSN to the MS as part of the authentication process.
RAT Radio Access Technology
RATI Receive Antenna Transceiver Interface.
RAx Rate Adaptation.
RBDS Remote BSS Diagnostic System (a discontinued Motorola
diagnostic facility).
RBER Residual Bit Error Ratio. RBER is a ratio of the number of
bits in error to the total number of bits received, within error
detected speech frames defined as good. The measurement
period over which the calculation is made is 480 ms. During this
period, 24 speech frames are decoded and a ratio calculated.
By referring to a lookup table, the ratio is then converted to an
RBER Quality number between 0 and 7.
RBTS Remote Base Transceiver Station. A BTS that is not co-located
with the BSC that controls it.
RCB Radio Control Board. Part of the DRCU.
RCI Radio Channel Identifier. The unique identifier of the radio
channel portion of the circuit path.
RCI Radio Channel Interface. The RCI changes the MS address
used in the RSS (channel number) to the address used in
Layer 3 in the BSC CP.
RCP Radio Control Processor.
RCU Radio Channel Unit. Part of the BSS. Contains transceiver,
digital control circuits, and power supply. Note: The RCU is
now obsolete, see DRCU.
RCVR Receiver.
RDB Requirements Database.
RDBMS Relational DataBase Management System (INFORMIX). The
database management system for the OMC-R database.
RDI Restricted Digital Information.
RDIS Radio Digital Interface System.
RDM Reference Distribution Module. The RDM provides a stable
3MHz reference signal to all transceivers. It is used for carrier
and injection frequency synthesis.
RDN Relative Distinguished Name. A series of RDNs form a unique
identifier, the distinguished name, for a particular network
element.

12-54 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

REC, Rec RECommendation.

Reciprocal neighbour Used to describe adjacent cells; each being designated as
a neighbour of the other. Also known as bi-directional and
two-way neighbour.
Registration The process of a MS registering its location with the MSC in
order to make or receive calls. This occurs whenever the MS
first activates or moves into a new service area.
REJ REJect(ion).
REL RELease.
RELP Residual Excited Linear Predictive. A form of speech coding.
RELP coders are usually used to give good quality speech at
bit rates in the region of 9.6 kbit/s.
RELP-LTP RELP Long Term Prediction. A name for GSM full rate. See
Full Rate.
Remotely Tuned Combiner A combiner device which houses two processors (for
paired-redundancy) and several tuneable cavities. See also
COMB
resync Resynchronize/resynchronization.
REQ REQuest.
Reuse Pattern The minimum number of cells required in a pattern before
channel frequencies are reused, to prevent interference.
Varies between cell configuration type and channel type. The
pattern shows assignments of adjacent channels to minimize
interference between cells and sectors within the pattern area.
Revgen A Motorola DataGen utility for producing an MMI script from a
binary object database.
RF See Radio Frequency.
RFC, RFCH Radio Frequency Channel. A partition of the system RF
spectrum allocation with a defined bandwidth and centre
frequency.
RFE Radio Front End (module).
RFE Receiver Front End (shelf).
RFEB Receiver Front End Board. Part of DRCU II.
RFI Radio Frequency Interference.
RFM Radio Frequency Module.
RFN Reduced TDMA Frame Number.
RFU Reserved for Future Use.
RJ45 Registered Jack 45. An eight-wire connector used commonly
to connect computers onto a local-area networks (LAN),
especially Ethernets.
RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer. A type of microprocessor
that recognizes a relatively limited number of instruction types,
allowing it to operate at relatively higher speeds.
RL Remote login. RL is a means by which the operator performs
configuration management, fault management, and some
performance management procedures at the NEs. The RL
software manages the X.25 connection for remote login. The
circuit is made by the OMC-R calling the NE.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-55

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

RLC Release Complete. An SCCP message type used with RLSD

to release a connection.
RLC Radio Link Control. Air interface transmission layer. The RLC
function processes the transfer of PDUs from the LLC layer.
RLM RF Link Manager.
RLP Radio Link Protocol. An ARQ protocol used to transfer user
data between an MT and IWF. See GSM 04.22.
RLR Receive Loudness Rating. See SLR.
RLSD ReLeaSeD. An SCCP message type used with RLC to release
a connection.
RMS Root Mean Square (value). The most common mathematical
method of defining the effective voltage or current of an AC
wave. For a sine wave, the rms value is 0.707 times the peak
value.
RMSU Remote Mobile Switching Unit. An RMSU is a line concentrator.
It may be inserted between the MSC and some of the BSS
sites served by the MSC to reduce the number of terrestrial
signalling and traffic circuits required.
RNTABLE Table of 128 integers in the hopping sequence.
ROAM Reliability, Operability, Availability, Maintainability.
Roaming Situation where mobile station operates in a cellular system
other than the one from which service is subscribed.
ROM Read Only Memory. Computer memory that allows fast
access to permanently stored data but prevents addition to or
modification of the data. ROM is inherently non-volatile storage
- it retains its contents even when the power is switched off.
ROSE Remote Operations Service Element. An ASE which carries a
message between devices over an association established by
ASCE (a CCITT specification for O & M) (OMC).
Roundtrip Time period between transmit and receive instant of a timeslot
in the BTS, propagation determined by the response behaviour
of the MS and the MS to BTS delay distance.
RPE Regular Pulse Excited (codec). See RPE-LTP.
RPE-LTP Regular Pulse Excitation - Long Term Prediction. The GSM
digital speech coding scheme. GSM uses a simplified RPE
codec, with long-term prediction, operating at 13 kbits/s to
provide toll quality speech.
RPOA Recognised Private Operating Agency. Private
telecommunications operator recognised by the appropriate
telecommunications authority.
RPR Read Privilege Required. Part of the table structure of the
OMC database schema. Access to the column is allowed only
for privileged accounts.
RR Radio Resource management. Part of the GSM management
layer. The functions provided by RR include paging, cipher
mode set, frequency redefinition, assignments, handover and
measurement reports.
RR Receive Ready.

12-56 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

RRSM Radio Resource State Machine. Translates messages through

Call Processing (CP). Activates and deactivates radio channels
as controlled by the CRM.
RRSM Radio Resource Switch Manager.
RS232 Recommended Standard 232. The interface between a
terminal (DTE) and a modem (DCE) for the transfer of serial
data. Standard serial interface.
RSE Radio System Entity.
RSL Radio Signalling Link. RSL is used for signalling between the
BSC and BTSs. The interface uses a 64 kbit/s timeslot with
a LAPD protocol.
RSLF Radio System Link Function.
RSLP Radio System Link Processor.
RSS Radio SubSystem (replaced by BSS).
RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator. A parameter returned from
a transceiver that gives a measure of the RF signal strength
between the MS and BTS, either uplink or downlink.
RSZI Regional Subscription Zone Identity. The RSZI defines the
regions in which roaming is allowed. The elements of the RSZI
are:The Country Code (CC) which identifies the country in
which the GSM PLMN is located,The National Destination Code
(NDC) which identifies the GSM PLMN in that country,The
Zone Code (ZC) which identifies a regional subscription zone
as a pattern of allowed and not allowed location areas uniquely
within that PLMN.
RTC Remotely Tuneable Channel Combiner. RTCs are used to
fine-tune the cavities to the right frequency. A poorly tuned
cavity can cause power destined for the antenna to be reversed.
RTE Remote Terminal Emulator.
RTF Radio Transceiver Function. RTF is the function that supports
the air interface channel and the DRI/Transceiver pair. When
equipping a DRI at a remote BTS, one or more RTFs must
be equipped.
RTF Receive Transmit Functions.
RTS Request to Send. A handshaking signal used with
communication links, especially RS232 or CCITT Rec. V.24 to
indicate (from a transmitter to a receiver) that data is ready for
transmission. See also CTS.
RU Rack Unit.
Run level System processor operating mode.
Rx Receive(r).
RX Receive window buffer.
RXCDR Remote Transcoder. An RXCDR is used when the transcoding
is performed at a site away from the BSC. This site would be
at or near the MSC. This enables 4:1 multiplexing in which the
transcoded data for four logical channels is combined onto one
64 kbit/s link, thus reducing the number of links required for
interconnection to the BSCs. See also XCDR.
RXF Receive Function (of the RTF).

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-57

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

RXLEV Received signal level. An indication of received signal level

based on the RSSI. RXLEV is one of the two criteria for
evaluating the reception quality (the basis for handover and
power control). See also RXQUAL. The MS reports RXLEV
values related to the apparent received RF signal strength. It is
necessary for these levels to attain sufficient accuracy for the
correct functioning of the system.
RXLEV-D Received signal level downlink.
RXLEV-U Received signal level uplink.
RXQUAL Received signal quality. An indication of the received signal
quality based on the BER. RXQUAL is one of the two criteria
for evaluating the reception quality (the basis for handover
and power control). See also RXLEV. The MS measures the
received signal quality, which is specified in terms of BER
before channel decoding averaged over the reporting period of
length of one SACCH multiframe.
RXQUAL-D Received signal quality downlink.
RXQUAL-U Received signal quality uplink.
RXU Remote Transcoder Unit. The shelf which houses the remote
transcoder modules in a BSSC cabinet at a remote transcoder
site.

S7- SYSGEN

S7 See SS7.
S/W SoftWare.
SABM Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode. A message which
establishes the signalling link over the air interface.
SABME SABM Extended.
SACCH Slow Associated Control CHannel. A GSM control channel
used by the MS for conveying power control and timing
advance information in the downlink direction, and RSSI and
link quality reports in the uplink direction.
SACCH/C4 Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/4.
SACCH/C8 Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/8.
SACCH/T Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel.
SACCH/TF Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel Full rate.
SACCH/TH Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel Half rate.
SAGE A brand of trunk test equipment.
SAP Service Access Point. In the reference model for OSI, SAPs of
a layer are defined as gates through which services are offered
to an adjacent higher layer.
SAP System Audits Process. SAP is on each GPROC in the BSS. It
monitors the status of the BSS on a periodic (scheduled) and
on-demand basis during normal mode. SAP detects faulty or
degrading hardware and software (through the use of audit
tests) and notifies the Alarms handling software of the condition.

12-58 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

SAPI Service Access Point Indicator (identifier). The OSI term for the
component of a network address which identifies the individual
application on a host which is sending or receiving a packet.
SAW Surface Acoustic Wave. SAW devices basically consist of an
input transducer to convert electrical signals to tiny acoustic
waves, which then travel through the solid propagation medium
to the output transducer where they are reconverted to
electrical signals. SAW band pass filters are used for sorting
signals by frequency.
SB Synchronization Burst (see Synchronization burst).
SBUS Serial Bus. An SBUS is a logical device made up of the
communication path between the GPROCs and LANX cards
in a cage.
SC Service Centre (used for Short Message Service).
SC Service Code.
SCCA System Change Control Administration. Software module
which allows full or partial software download to the NE (OMC).
SCCP Signalling Connection Control Part (part of SS7).
SCEG Speech Coding Experts Group (of GSM).
SCH Synchronization CHannel. A GSM broadcast control channel
used to carry information for frame synchronization of MSs and
identification of base stations.
SCI Status Control Interface. A slave to the Status Control Manager.
SCIP Serial Communication Interface Processor.
SCM Status Control Manager. Accepts messages from other
processors within the switch requesting status displays in the
form of one or more lights on a hardware panel. The SCM maps
the status display requests into specific commands to the status
control interface processor to turn on and/or turn off lights.
SCN Sub-Channel Number. One of the parameters defining a
particular physical channel in a BS.
SCP Service Control Point (an intelligent network entity).
SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface. A processor-independent
standard for system-level interfacing between a computer and
intelligent devices including hard disks, floppy disks, CD-ROM,
printers, scanners, and many more. SCSI-1 can connect up to
seven devices to a single SCSI adaptor (or host adaptor) on
the computer’s bus.
SCU Slim Channel Unit.
SCU900 Slim Channel Unit for GSM900.
SDCCH Stand-alone Dedicated Control CHannel. A GSM control
channel where the majority of call setup occurs. Used for MS to
BTS communications before MS assigned to TCH. A SDCCH
is used by a single MS for call setup, authentication, location
updating and SMS point to point.
SDL Specification Description Language. A method for visually
depicting the functionality of call processing, operations and
maintenance software.
SDM Sub-rate Data Multiplexor

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-59

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

SDT SDL Development Tool. A software tool to model and validate

real-time, state-based product software designs.
SDU Service Data Unit. In layered systems, a set of data that is sent
by a user of the services of a given layer, and is transmitted to
a peer service user semantically unchanged.
SDR Special Drawing Rights. The SDR is the International
Monetary Fund unit of account. It also serves as a basis for
the unit of account for a number of other international
organizations and as a basis for private financial instruments.
The SDR is based on the values of the euro, U
.S. dollar, Jap
anese yen and pound sterling.
SE Support Entity. See SEF.
Secondary Cell A cell which is not optimized in the network and has a
co-located neighbour whose cell boundary follows the boundary
of the said cell. The secondary cell has a preferred band the
same as that of its own frequency type.
SEF Support Entity Function. SEFs are functions not directly
involved in the telecommunication process. They include fault
localisation, protection switching, etc. (GSM Rec.12.00).
Session Layer See OSI RM. The Session Layer responds to service requests
from the Presentation Layer and issues service requests to
the Transport Layer. It provides the mechanism for managing
the dialogue between end-user application processes. It
provides for either duplex or half-duplex operation and
establishes checkpointing, adjournment, termination, and
restart procedures.
SFH Synthesizer Frequency Hopping. The principle of SFH is that
every mobile transmits its time slots according to a sequence of
frequencies that it derives from an algorithm. The frequency
hopping occurs between time slots and, therefore, a mobile
station transmits (or receives) on a fixed frequency during one
time slot. It must then hop before the time slot on the next
TDMA frame. Due to the time needed for monitoring other
base stations the time allowed for hopping is approximately 1
ms, according to the receiver implementation. The receive and
transmit frequencies are always duplex frequencies.
SGSN Serving GPRS Support Node. The SGSN provides the control,
transmission, OAMP, and charging functions. It keeps track of
the individual MS locations, and performs security functions
and access control. The SGSN is connected to the BSS via a
Frame Relay network.
SI Screening Indicator. The supplementary service (SS) screening
indicator is sent by the MS at the beginning of the radio
connection to allow the network to assess the capabilities of the
MS and hence determine either whether a particular network
initiated SS operation may be invoked or which version of a
network initiated SS operation should be invoked. The SS
screening indicator is only relevant to network initiated SS
operation and is valid for the duration of a radio connection.
SI Service Interworking. Part of the IWF.
SI Supplementary Information.
SI System Information.

12-60 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

SIA Supplementary Information A.

SID Silence Descriptor. The transmission of comfort noise
information to the RX side is achieved by means of a SID
frame. A SID frame is transmitted at the end of speech bursts
and serves as an end of speech marker for the RX side. In
order to update the comfort noise characteristics at the RX
side, SID frames are transmitted at regular intervals also during
speech pauses. This also serves the purpose of improving the
measurement of the radio link quality by the radio subsystem
(RSS).
SIF Signal Information Field. The bits of a message signal unit that
carry information for a certain user transaction; the SIF always
contains a label.
Signalling System No.7 See SS7.
SIM Subscriber Identity Module. Removable module which is
inserted into a mobile equipment; it is considered as part of
the MS. It contains security related information (IMSI, Ki, PIN),
other subscriber related information and the algorithms A3 and
A8.
SIMM Single Inline Memory module.
SIMM System Integrated Memory Module. A small plug-in circuit
board providing additional RAM for a computer.
SIO Service Information Octet. Eight bits contained in a message
signal unit, comprising the service indicator and sub-service
field. A value in the SIF of an SS7 signalling message
specifying the User Part type.
SITE BSC, BTS or collocated BSC-BTS site.
SIX Serial Interface eXtender. Converts interface levels to TTL
levels. Used to extend 2 serial ports from GPROC to external
devices (RS232, RS422, and fibre optics).
SK Secondary Key. A database column attribute, the secondary
key indicates an additional index and/or usage as a composite
key.
SL See Session Layer.
SL Signalling Link. The signalling links between the various
network elements are: Remote BTS to BSC - Radio Signalling
Link (RSL), BSC to MSC - Message Transfer Link (MTL),
OMC(R) to BSS - Operations and Maintenance Link (OML),
Remote XCDR to BSC - XCDR signalling Link (XBL), CBC to
BSC - Cell Broadcast Link (CBL).
SLNK Serial Link. One of four communications paths between SCIP
and peripheral equipment. The information on the link is sent
serially in a bit-synchronous format.
SLR Send Loudness Rating. The SLR, in the mobile to land
direction, and the Receive Loudness Rating (RLR) in the land
to mobile direction, determine the audio signal levels for the
customers speech. The loudness ratings are calculated from
the send and receive sensitivity masks or frequency responses.
SLTA Signalling Link Test Acknowledge. Message sent from the
MSC to the BSC in response to an SLTM.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-61

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

SLTM Signalling Link Test Message. During the process of bringing

an MTL link into service, the BSC sends an SLTM message to
the MSC. The MSC responds with an SLTA message.
SM Switch Manager. The function of the SM is to connect a MS
terrestrial trunk from the MSC (designated by the MSC), to the
radio channel given to a MS by the cell resource manager in
the BSS software.
SM Summing Manager.
SMAE System Management Application Entity (CCITT Q795, ISO
9596). OSI terminology for a software Management Information
Server that manages a network.
SMASE System Management Application Service Element.
SMCB Short Message Cell Broadcast.
SME Short Message Entity. An entity that may send or receive Short
Messages. The SME may be located in a fixed network, an
MS, or a SC. See also SMS.
SMG Special Mobile Group. To avoid confusion between the GSM
system and the GSM committee with its wider responsibilities,
the committee was renamed SMG in 1992.
SMP Motorola Software Maintenance Program. A Motorola program
designed to ensure the highest quality of software with the
highest level of support.
SMS Short Message Service. SMS is a globally accepted wireless
service that enables the transmission of alphanumeric
messages between mobile subscribers and external systems
such as electronic mail, paging, and voice-mail systems. It
transfers the short messages, up to 160 characters, between
Smts and MSs via an SMS-SC. See also SMS-SC, SMS/PP
and Smt.
SMSCB Short Message Service Cell Broadcast. SMSCB is a service in
which short messages may be broadcast from a PLMN to MSs.
SMSCB messages come from different sources (e.g. traffic
reports, weather reports). Messages are not acknowledged by
the MS. Reception of SMSCB messages by the MS is only
possible in idle mode. The geographical area over which each
message is transmitted is selected by the PLMN operator, by
agreement with the provider of the information.
SMS-SC Short Message Service - Service Centre. SMS-SC is an
interworking unit between stationary networks and the GSM
Network. It acts as a store and forward centre for short
messages. See also SMS, SMS/PP and Smt.
SMS/PP Short Message Service/Point-to-Point. Two different
point-to-point services have been defined: Mobile Originated
(MO) and Mobile Terminated (MT). A short message always
originates or terminates in the GSM network. This means that
short messages can never be sent between two users both
located in stationary networks. See also SMS, SMS-SC and
Smt.
Smt Short message terminal. See also SMS, SMS-SC and
SMS/PP. There are different types of Smt interfaces, one being
the Computer Access Interface which provides services for
external computers communicating with SMS-SCs through the
Computer Access Protocol.

12-62 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

SN Subscriber Number.
SND SeND.
SNDR SeNDeR.
SNR Serial NumbeR.
SOA Suppress Outgoing Access (CUG SS). An arrangement which
prevents a member of a CUG placing calls outside the CUG.
Software Instance A complete set of software and firmware objects including the
database object.
SP Service Provider. The organisation through which the
subscriber obtains GSM telecommunications services. This
may be a network operator or possibly a separate body.
SP Signalling Point. A signalling point is a node within a SS7
network.
SP Special Product.
SP SPare.
SPARC Scalable Processor ArChitecture. a 32- and 64-bit
microprocessor architecture from Sun Microsystems that is
based on the Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC).
SPARC has become a widely-used architecture for hardware
used with UNIX-based operating systems.
SPC Signalling Point Code.
SPC Suppress Preferential CUG. Prohibits the use of the preferential
CUG, on a per call basis.
SPI Signalling Point Inaccessible.
SPP Single Path Preselector.
SQE Signal Quality Error.
SQL Structured Query Language. The standard language for
relational database management systems as adopted by the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI X3.135-1989) and
the International Standards Organization (ISO 9075-1989).
SRD Service Request Distributor.
SRES Signed RESponse (authentication). The SRES is calculated by
the MS, using the RAND, and sent to the SGSN to authenticate
the MS.
SS Supplementary Service. A modification of, or a supplement to,
a basic telecommunication service.
SS System Simulator.
SS7 ITU-TSS Common Channel Signalling System No. 7. Also
known as C7, S7 or SS#7. The standard defines the procedures
and protocol by which network elements in the PSTN exchange
information over a digital signalling network to effect wireless
(cellular) and wireline call setup, routing and control.
SSA SubSystem-Allowed. SSA is used for SCCP subsystem
management. An SSA message is sent to concerned
destinations to inform those destinations that a subsystem
which was formerly prohibited is now allowed. (see ITU-T
Recommendation Q.712 para 1.15).
SSAP Site System Audits Processor.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-63

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

SSC Supplementary Service Control string. When a subscriber

selects a supplementary service control from the menu in a
GSM network, the mobile station invokes the SSC by sending
the network the appropriate functional signalling message.
SSF Subservice Field. The level 3 field containing the network
indicator and two spare bits.
SSM SCCP Switch Manager.
SSM Signalling State Machine.
SSN SubSystem Number. In SS7, each signalling point (SP) may
contain a number of subsystems. Each subsystem has a
unique ID, the SSN (e.g. 149 for SGSN and 6 for HLR).
SSP Service Switching Point. Intelligent Network Term for the Class
4/5 Switch. The SSP has an open interface to the IN for
switching signalling, control and handoff.
SSP Subsystem-prohibited. SSP is used for SCCP subsystem
management. An SSP message is sent to concerned
destinations to inform SCCP Management at those destinations
of the failure of a subsystem.
SSS Switching SubSystem. The SSC comprises the MSC and the
LRs.
STAN Statistical ANalysis (processor).
STAT STATistics.
stats Statistics.
STC System Timing Controller. The STC provides the timing
functions for the GPROC.
STMR Side Tone Masking rating. A rating, expressed in dB, based on
how a speaker will perceive his own voice when speaking.
SUERM Signal Unit Error Rate Monitor. A link error rate monitor.
STP Signalling Transfer Point. A node in the SS7 telephone network
that routes messages between exchanges and between
exchanges and databases that hold subscriber and routing
information.
SU Signal Unit. A group of bits forming a separately transferable
entity used to convey information on a signalling link.
SunOS Sun Microsystems UNIX Operating System. SunOS was
renamed Solaris.
Superframe 51 traffic/associated control multiframes or 26
broadcast/common control multiframes (period 6.12s).
Super user User account that can access all files, regardless of protection
settings, and control all user accounts.
SURF Sectorized Universal Receiver Front-end (Used in
Horizonmacro).
SVC Switch Virtual Circuit. A temporary virtual circuit that is set up
and used only as long as data is being transmitted. Once the
communication between the two hosts is complete, the SVC
disappears. See also PVC.
SVM SerVice Manager. The SVM provides overall management
authority for all in-service service circuits.

12-64 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

SVN Software Version Number. The SVN allows the ME

manufacturer to identify different software versions of a given
type approved mobile. See also IMEI and IMEISV.
SW Software.
SWFM SoftWare Fault Management. Software faults are handled
through a SWFM facility which routes those events to the OMC
independently through the FCP.
SYM SYstem information Manager. The SYM builds and sends
GPRS system information messages over the BCCH.
sync synchronize/synchronization.
Synchronization burst Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation
bit stream carries information for the MS to synchronize its
frame to that of the received signal.
Synthesizer hopping Synthesizer hopping is a method of frequency hopping in
which the RCUs are re-tuned in real-time, from frequency to
frequency.
SYS SYStem.
SYSGEN SYStem GENeration. The Motorola procedure for loading a
configuration database into a BTS.

T -TxBPF

T Timer.
T Transparent.
T Type only.
T1 Digital WAN carrier facility that transmits DS-1-formatted
data at 1544 kbp/s through the telephone-switching network.
companies. T1 lines are widely used for private networks as
well as interconnections between an organization’s PBX or
LAN and the telco.
T43 Type 43 Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12
unbalanced (6-pair) 75 ohm (T43 coax connectors) lines for 2
Mbit/s circuits (See BIB).
TA Terminal Adaptor. A physical entity in the MS providing terminal
adaptation functions (see GSM 04.02).
TA See Timing Advance.
TAC Type Approval Code. Part of the IMEISV.
TACS Total Access Communication System. European analogue
cellular system.
TAF Terminal Adaptation Function.
TATI Transmit Antenna Transceiver Interface. The TATI consists of
RF combining equipments, either Hybrid or Cavity Combining.
See CCB.
TAXI Transparent Asynchronous Transmitter/Receiver Interface
(physical layer). A 100 Mbps ATM transmission standard
defined by the ATM Forum.
TBD To Be Determined.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-65

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

TBF Temporary Block Flow. MAC modes support the provision of

TBFs allowing the point-to-point transfer of signalling and user
data between the network and an MS.
TBR Technical Basis for Regulation. An ETSI document containing
technical requirements and procedures.
TBUS TDM Bus. A TBUS is a logical device made up of the TDM
backplane of a cage, the KSW devices managing the TDM
highway of the cage, and local and remote KSWX devices (if
they exist).
TC Transaction Capabilities. TC refers to a protocol structure
above the network layer interface (i.e., the SCCP service
interface) up to the application layer including common
application service elements but not the specific application
service elements using them. TC is structured as a Component
sub-layer above a Transaction sub-layer.
TCAP Transaction Capabilities Application Part. The layer of the SS7
protocol that is used to obtain Routing data for certain services.
TCB TATI Control Board.
TCH Traffic CHannel. GSM logical channels which carry either
encoded speech or user data.
TCH/F A full rate TCH. See also Full Rate.
TCH/F2.4 A full rate TCH at ? 2.4 kbit/s.
TCH/F4.8 A full rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s.
TCH/F9.6 A full rate TCH at 9.6 kbit/s.
TCH/FS A full rate Speech TCH.
TCH/H A half rate TCH. See also Half Rate.
TCH/H2.4 A half rate TCH at ? 2.4 kbit/s.
TCH/H4.8 A half rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s.
TCH/HS A half rate Speech TCH.
TCI Transceiver Control Interface.
TCP Transmission Control Protocol. TCP is one of the main
protocols in TCP/IP networks. Whereas the IP protocol deals
only with packets, TCP enables two hosts to establish a
connection and exchange streams of data. TCP guarantees
delivery of data and also guarantees that packets will be
delivered in the same order in which they were sent. See also
IP and TCP/IP.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Two
interrelated protocols that are part of the Internet protocol suite.
TCP operates on the OSI Transport Layer and IP operates on
the OSI Network Layer. See also IP and TCP.
TC-TR Technical Commitee Technical Report.
TCU Transceiver Control Unit.
TDF Twin Duplexed Filter. Used in M-Cellhorizon.

12-66 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

TDM Time Division Multiplexing. A type of multiplexing that combines

data streams by assigning each stream a different time slot in a
set. TDM repeatedly transmits a fixed sequence of time slots
over a single transmission channel. Within T-Carrier systems,
such as T-1 and T-3, TDM combines PCM streams created for
each conversation or data stream.
TDMA Time Division Multiple Access. A technology for delivering
digital wireless service using TDM. TDMA works by dividing
a radio frequency into time slots and then allocating slots to
multiple calls. In this way, a single frequency can support
multiple, simultaneous data channels.
TDU TopCell Digital Unit. Part of the TopCell BTS hardware. A TDU
is capable of supporting 6 TRUs for supporting up to 6 sectors.
TE Terminal Equipment. Equipment that provides the functions
necessary for the operation of the access protocols by the user.
Tei Terminal endpoint identifier. A number that identifies a specific
connection endpoint within a service access point.
TEI Terminal Equipment Identity.
TEMP TEMPorary.
TEST TEST control processor.
TF Transmission Function. The TF provides layered protocol
software for handling payload information transfer and for
providing signalling communications between the control
function and external systems.
TFA TransFer Allowed. An SPC route management message used
to notify adjacent signalling points of an accessible route.
TFP TransFer Prohibited. An SPC route management message
used to notify adjacent signalling points of an inaccessible
route.
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol. TFTP is a simple form of FTP. It
uses UDP and provides no security features. It is often used by
servers to boot diskless workstations, X-terminals, and routers.
TI Transaction Identifier.
Timeslot The multiplex subdivision in which voice and signalling bits are
sent over the air. Each RF carrier is divided into 8 timeslots.
See also ARFCN.
Timing advance A signal sent by the BTS to the MS. It enables the MS to
advance the timing of its transmission to the BTS so as to
compensate for propagation delay.
TL See Transport Layer.
TLLI Temporary Logical Link Identifier.
TLV Type, Length and Value. An encoding element composed of
three fields: a type identifier, a length indicator, and content
octets.
TM Traffic Manager.
TMI TDM Modem Interface board. Provides analogue interface
from IWF to modems for 16 circuits. Part of IWF.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-67

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

TMM Traffic Metering and Measuring. TMM provides system tools

to be used by traffic engineering and switch maintenance
personnel to determine if the system is operating correctly.
TMM reports are provided for trunk circuits, trunk groups,
service circuits, call routing and miscellaneous system data.
TMN Telecommunications Management Network. The
physical entities required to implement the
Network Management functionality for the PLMN.
Also, TMN was originated formally in 1988 under the ITU-TS
as a strategic goal to create or identify standard interfaces
that would allow a network to be managed consistently across
all network element suppliers. The concept has led to a
series of interrelated efforts at developing standard ways to
define and address network elements. TMN uses the OSI
Management Standards as its framework. TMN applies to
wireless communications and cable TV as well as to private
and public wired networks.
TMSI Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity. A unique identity
temporarily allocated by the MSC to a visiting mobile subscriber
to process a call. May be changed between calls and even
during a call, to preserve subscriber confidentiality.
TN Timeslot Number.
TOM Tunneling of Messages.
TON Type Of Number.
Traffic channels Channels which carry user’s speech or data. See also TCH.
Traffic unit Equivalent to an erlang.
Training sequence Sequence of modulating bits employed to facilitate timing
recovery and channel equalization in the receiver.
Transport Layer See OSI RM. The Transport Layer responds to service requests
from the Session Layer and issues service requests to the
Network Layer. Its purpose is to provide transparent transfer
of data between end users, thus relieving the upper layers
from any concern with providing reliable and cost-effective
data transfer.
TRS Timeslot Resource Shifter. The TRS determines which
timeslots are active in a PRP board to perform a control of the
GPRS traffic.
TRAU Transcoder Rate Adaption Unit. TRAU converts the encoded
voice and rate adapted data into 64 kbps data for the PSTN.
TRM Terrestrial Resource Management.
TRU TopCell Radio unit.
TRX Transceiver(s). A network component which can serve full
duplex communication on 8 full-rate traffic channels according
to specification GSM 05.02. If Slow Frequency Hopping (SFH)
is not used, then the TRX serves the communication on one
RF carrier.
TS Technical Specification.
TS TeleService. Any service provided by a telecommunication
provider.
TS TimeSlot (see Timeslot).

12-68 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

TS1 Training Sequence 1.

TS2 Training Sequence 2.
TSA TimeSlot Acquisition.
TSA TimeSlot Assignment.
TSDA Transceiver Speech & Data Interface.
TSC Training Sequence Code. A training sequence is sent at the
centre of a burst to help the receiver identify and synchronize
to the burst. The training sequence is a set sequence of bits
which is known by both the transmitter and receiver. There are
eight different TSCs numbered 0 to 7. Nearby cells operating
with the same RF carrier frequency use different TSCs to allow
the receiver to identify the correct signal.
TSI TimeSlot Interchange. The interchange of timeslots within a
TDM stream.
TSDI Transceiver Speech and Data Interface.
TSM Transceiver Station Manager.
TSN TRAU SyNc.
TSW Timeslot SWitch.
TTCN Tree and Tabular Combined Notation. TTCN is a programming
language endorsed by ISO that is used to write test suites for
telecommunications systems.
TTL Transistor to Transistor Logic. A common semiconductor
technology for building discrete digital logic integrated circuits.
TTY TeleTYpe (refers to any terminal).
TU Traffic Unit.
TU3 Typical Urban with the MS travelling at 3 kph. Dynamic model
against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be
measured. See also TU50, HT100, RA250 and EQ50.
TU50 Typical Urban with the MS travelling at 50 kph. Dynamic model
against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be
measured. See also TU3, HT100, RA250 and EQ50.
TUP Telephone User Part. TUP was an earlier implementation of
SS7 and generally does not allow for data type applications.
TV Type and Value.
Two-way neighbour See Reciprocal neighbour.
Tx Transmit(ter).
TX Transmit window buffer.
TXF Transmit Function. See RTF.
TXPWR Transmit PoWeR. Tx power level in the
MS_TXPWR_REQUEST and MS_TXPWR_CONF
parameters.
TxBPF Transmit Bandpass Filter. See BPF.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-69

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

U - UUS

UA Unnumbered Acknowledgment. A message sent from the MS

to the BSS to acknowledge release of radio resources when
a call is being cleared.
UCS2 Universal Coded Character Set 2. A codeset containing all of
the characters commonly used in computer applications.
UDI Unrestricted Digital Information.
UDP User Datagram Protocol. UDP is a connectionless protocol that,
like TCP, runs on top of IP networks. Unlike TCP/IP, UDP/IP
provides very few error recovery services, offering instead a
direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network.
It is used primarily for broadcasting messages over a network.
UDUB User Determined User Busy.
UFE Uplink Frame Error.
UHF Ultra High Frequency. The UHF range of the radio spectrum is
the band extending from 300 MHz to 3 GHz.
UI Unnumbered Information (Frame).
UIC Union International des Chemins de Fer. The UIC is the
worldwide organisation for cooperation among railway
companies. Its activities encompass all fields related to the
development of rail transport.
UID User ID. Unique number used by the system to identify the user.
UL Upload (of software or database from an NE to a BSS).
UL UpLink.
ULC UpLink Concatenator. The ULC concatenates RLC data blocks
into LLC frames.
Um Air interface.
UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System. The European
implementation of the 3G wireless phone system. UMTS, which
is part of IMT-2000, provides service in the 2GHz band and
offers global roaming and personalized features. Designed as
an evolutionary system for GSM network operators, multimedia
data rates up to 2 Mbps are expected.
UNIX A multiuser, multitasking operating system that is widely used
as the master control program in workstations and especially
servers. UNIX was developed by AT&T and freely distributed to
government and academic institutions, causing it to be ported
to a wider variety of machine families than any other operating
system. As a result, UNIX became synonymous with open
systems.
UPCMI Uniform PCM Interface (13 bit). The UPCMI is introduced for
design purposes in order to separate the speech transcoder
impairments from the basic audio impairments of the MS.
UPD Up to Date.
Uplink Physical link from the MS towards the BTS (MS transmits, BTS
receives).

12-70 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply. A device that is inserted

between a primary power source, such as a commercial utility,
and the primary power input of equipment to be protected,
e.g., a computer system, for the purpose of eliminating the
effects of transient anomalies or temporary outages. Backup
power is used when the electrical power fails or drops to an
unacceptable voltage level.
UPU User Part Unavailable.
Useful part of burst That part of the burst used by the demodulator; differs from
the full burst because of the bit shift of the I and Q parts of the
GMSK signal.
USF Uplink State Flag.
USSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data. The USSD
mechanism allows the MS user and a PLMN operator defined
application to communicate in a way which is transparent to
the MS and to intermediate network entities. The mechanism
allows development of PLMN specific supplementary services.
UTRAN UMTS Radio Access Network
UUS User-to-User Signalling supplementary service. The UUS
supplementary service allows a mobile subscriber to
send/receive a limited amount of information to/from another
PLMN or ISDN subscriber over the signalling channel in
association with a call to the other subscriber.

V - VTX host

V Value only.
VA Viterbi Algorithm (used in channel equalizers). An algorithm to
compute the optimal (most likely) state sequence in a model
given a sequence of observed outputs.
VAD Voice Activity Detection. A process used to identify presence or
absence of speech data bits. VAD is used with DTX.
VAP Videotex Access Point.
VBS Voice Broadcast Service. VBS allows the distribution of speech
(or other signals which can be transmitted via the speech
codec), generated by a service subscriber, into a predefined
geographical area to all or a group of service subscribers
located in this area.
VC See Virtual Circuit.
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator. An oscillator whose clock
frequency is determined by the magnitude of the voltage
presented at its input. The frequency changes when the
voltage changes.
VCXO Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator.
VDU Visual Display Unit. A device used for the real-time temporary
display of computer output data. Monitor.
VGCS Voice Group Call Service.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-71

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

Videotex The Videotex service is an interactive service, that by means of

proper access points and standardized procedures, provides
the access to data base information stored in host computers
external to the PLMN, via public telecommunication networks.
Virtual Circuit A connection between two devices, that functions as though
it is a direct connection, even though it may physically be
circuitous. The term is used most frequently to describe
connections between two hosts in a packet-switching network.
VLR Visitor Location Register. A GSM network element which
provides a temporary register for subscriber information for a
visiting subscriber. Often a part of the MSC.
VLSI Very Large Scale Integration (in ICs). The process of placing
between 100,000 and one million electronic components on
a single chip.
VMSC Visited MSC. (Recommendation not to be used).
vocoder Abbreviation for voice-coder. A device that usually consists of
a speech analyzer, which converts analog speech waveforms
into narrowband digital signals, and a speech synthesizer,
which converts the digital signals into artificial speech sounds.
VOX Voice Operated Transmission. An acoustoelectric transducer
and a keying relay connected so that the keying relay is
actuated when sound, or voice energy above a certain
threshold is sensed by the transducer. A vox is used to
eliminate the need for push-to-talk operation of a transmitter by
using voice energy to turn on the transmitter
VPLMN Visited PLMN.
VSC Videotex Service Centre.
V(SD) Send state variable.
VSP Vehicular Speaker Phone.
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. In a transmission line, the ratio
of maximum to minimum voltage in a standing wave pattern.
Note: The VSWR is a measure of impedance mismatch
between the transmission line and its load. The higher the
VSWR, the greater the mismatch. The minimum VSWR, i.e.,
that which corresponds to a perfect impedance match, is unity.
VTX host The components dedicated to Videotex service.

12-72 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Glossary of technical terms Version Rev

W - WWW

WAN Wide Area Network. A physical or logical network that provides

data communications to a larger number of independent users
than are usually served by a LAN and is usually spread over a
larger geographic area than that of a LAN. WANs may include
physical networks, such as ISDN networks, X.25 networks,
and T1 networks.
WPA Wrong Password Attempts (counter). Some supplementary
services have the option of the subscriber using a password.
If a password check is done with an incorrect password, the
WPA is incremented by one. If a password check is passed,
the WPA is set to zero. If the WPA exceeds the value three,
the subscriber will have to register a new password with the
service provider.
WS Work Station. The remote device via which O&M personnel
execute input and output transactions for network management
purposes.
WSF Work Station Function block.
WWW World Wide Web. An international, virtual-network-based
information service composed of Internet host computers that
provide on-line information in a specific hypertext format. WWW
servers provide hypertext metalanguage (HTML) formatted
documents using the hypertext transfer protocol, HTTP.
Information on the WWW is accessed with a hypertext browser.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular 12-73

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

X - X Window

X.25 X.25, adopted as a standard by the CCITT, is a commonly used

protocol for public packet-switched networks (PSPDNS). The
X.25 protocol allows computers on different public networks to
communicate through an intermediary computer at the network
layer level. The protocol corresponds closely to the data-link
and physical-layer protocols defined in the OSI communication
model.
X.25 link A communications link which conforms to X.25 specifications
and uses X.25 protocol (NE to OMC links).
XBL Transcoder to BSS Link. The carrier communications link
between the Transcoder (XCDR) and the BSS.
XCB Transceiver Control Board. Part of the Transceiver.
XCDR Full-rate Transcoder. The XCDR is the digital signal processing
equipment required to perform GSM-defined speech encoding
and decoding. In terms of data transmission, the speech
transcoder interfaces the 64 kbit/s PCM in the land network to
the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the Air Interface. See
also RXCDR.
XCDR board The circuit board required to perform speech transcoding at
the BSS or (R)XCDR). Also known as the MSI (XCDR) board.
Interchangeable with the GDP board.
XFER Transfer.
XID eXchange IDentifier.
xterm X terminal window. A terminal emulator program for the X
Window System. A user can have many different invocations
of xterm running at once on the same display, each of which
provides independent input and output for the process running
in it (normally a shell).
X Window A specification for device-independent windowing operations
on bitmap display devices.

ZC

ZC Zone Code. Part of the RSZI. The ZC identifies a regional

subscription zone as a pattern of allowed and not allowed
location areas uniquely within a PLMN.

12-74 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
Version Rev Glossary of technical terms

This page intentionally left blank.

12-75 CP02 - Introduction to GSM Cellular ©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED